JP2019069350A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball driven onto a game area 1100. When a game ball enters a start pocket, determination processing for winning is performed. Then, in acquisition of winning by the determination processing, after a performance image in winning is allowed to appear, control is performed to a state in which a winning game capable of acquiring a game ball is performed. In this regard, in the Pachinko game machine 1, after execution of a winning game, operation of an opening extension function is made difficult until finishing of specific lotteries for the number of hold upper-limit times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit game in which a player can obtain many awards is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when there is a game ball entering the starting opening, determination processing is performed on a hit serving as an execution trigger for the game with a predetermined winning probability. At this time, the decorative symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time on a predetermined display device. Then, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode in which it is shown that the player has won the winning, the player plays the winning game in which many awards can be obtained. . In addition, after the hit game is performed, transition control to an advantageous gaming state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball to the starting opening increases can be controlled.

JP 2008-022870 A

  By the way, as various game characteristics are proposed as game characteristics using the advantageous game state, more innovative game characteristics are required to be proposed.

  The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having novel playability.

Means 1: In a gaming machine in which transition control from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state is executable,
A specific starting opening which has a movable piece and can receive game media when the movable piece is operated;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the fact that game media are accepted to the particular starting opening,
Lottery means for performing a specific lottery based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Game holding means capable of executing control to make the specific lottery according to the obtained random number be held on hold until the specific holding upper limit number when the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
Special game progress control means capable of executing control to advance a game such that a bonus game state in which a bonus is given to the player occurs when a hit is obtained in a specific lottery by the lottery means;
Advantageous game control means for performing control of the operation of the movable piece with a control mode that facilitates the reception of game media to the specific start port in the advantageous game state than in the normal game state;
The transition control to the advantageous gaming state is performed while the specific lottery for the specific holding upper limit number is put on hold, and a hit is obtained in all of the specific draws that are put on hold. If not, the time reduction invalidation control means performs control such that the expected value of the number of times the movable piece is operated within the time required to complete the specific lottery for the specific upper limit hold number is less than "1". And a game machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the above configuration, the transition control to the advantageous gaming state is performed while the specific drawing for the specific holding upper limit number is put on hold, and all of the specific drawing that is put on hold is hit If it is not possible to receive the game media in the special opening, it is possible to accept the upper limit number of specific lotterys without giving the opportunity to receive the game media to the specific opening even though it is in the advantageous gaming state where the acceptance to the specific opening is facilitated. Can be encouraged to achieve a more innovative gameplay.

  That is, in general, in the advantageous gaming state where acceptance to the specific starting opening is facilitated, the opening is extended before the period controlled as the advantageous gaming state is over (before the prescribed number of times such as symbol variation is finished). The movable piece which has started to operate under the function operation may maintain its operating state (opened state) until the symbol variation exceeds the prescribed number of times controlled as the advantageous gaming state.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, for example, when the prescribed number of times maintained in the advantageous gaming state in which acceptance to the specific starting opening is easy is set to the same number as the holding upper limit number, the prescribed number of times It is suppressed that the operation | movement state by the open extension function will be maintained over the symbol fluctuation which exceeds. That is, when the hit is not obtained in all the specific lottery for the upper limit number of holdings, the operating opportunity of the movable piece by the open extension function despite being in the advantageous gaming state where the acceptance to the specific starting opening is made easy Since the specific lottery for the upper limit number of holdings can be digested without giving a and it can be urged to end the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state, the operation state by the open extension function becomes difficult to occur in the first place. In addition, in the case where a hit is obtained by any of the specific lottery held in the hold state, the corresponding result is obtained regardless of the situation concerning the movement of the movable piece and the situation concerning the acceptance of the game medium to the specific starting opening. Since the bonus gaming state occurs at the time of the game, there is no possibility that the symbol variation exceeding the above-mentioned prescribed number of times occurs.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in game interest can be suppressed.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning mouth unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a prize-winning mouth unit from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled into main components and viewed afterward. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the prize-winning mouth unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacking unit and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting opening unit of the winning opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a variable starting opening unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting opening unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the variable starting opening unit as viewed after being disassembled; It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit retracted | saved from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit advanced. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the prize item unit of the prize-winning mouth unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the prize unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is an AA sectional view in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize winning opening unit of the prize unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize product winning opening unit and it looked at after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V prize-winning mouth unit of the prize unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning a prize mouth unit and was seen after. (A) is an explanatory view showing, from the front side, a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body of the V winning opening unit faces the receiving side, and (b) a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body faces the V winning opening It is an explanatory view shown from the front side. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball of the right side in the game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit, (b) is a gaming ball in the state where the starting opening door member was advanced It is an explanatory view showing a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit from the left front, (b) is a gaming ball in the state where the starting opening door member was advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from left front, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state in which the starting opening door member is back from a left front. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front side the flow of the game ball when the prize winning opening is acceptable in the prize unit, and (b) is a V prize winning opening of the rotating body in the V prize winning unit It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball when it faces the side from the front side. It is the figure which looked at the prize winning opening opening and closing member from the top. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a periphery side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interruption board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal blocking board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of control processing of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process of a special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change of a special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit game start processing of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game processing of a special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game start processing of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit game processing of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the distribution table of various random numbers provided to a special symbol lottery. It is a time chart which shows the example about the relation between the open state of the prize winning opening when the small hit game (unfavorable small hit, advantageous small hit) is performed and the operation state of the rotating body (sorting device). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about an example of gate part passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure about an example of processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing performed every 16 ms by submain processing. It is a time chart which shows the example about the flow of a game when advancing a game based on the game characteristic of the pachinko machine 1, and the flow of the presentation according to it. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation content in a special award period. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation content in a special award period. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the display production pattern in a special award period. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation image which appears in a special award period. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation image which appears in a special award period. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation image which appears in a special award period.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball T as a game medium is hit, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the user side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball T arranged under the game window 101 And a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 in which the game ball T is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. Further, in the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and in a state where the gaming ball T is stored in the upper tray 301, the player handles the handle device 500. When the player rotates the player, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and a player can play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. It is possible not to touch the game ball T or the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98) in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like by inserting a hand or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13, and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a hitting operation of the game ball T and a door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. In order to close the game window 101 to the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 attached to the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 mounted on the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 mounted on the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 And a glass unit 590 to be mounted.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wiring holding member 197 holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control board provided on the game board 4 described later. An amplifier circuit is connected to the amplifier 4010 and amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs the amplified signal to the speakers 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300 and the like to the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4010 etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. Ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 through the front and back direction at a predetermined position. Handle for attaching the handle bracket 140 by tilting it so that the ball feed opening 113 for feeding to the right and the right (open side) end of the front located at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wiring passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the mounting portion 114 and the handle mounting portion 114 and through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 upper by being formed shorter extended cylindrical shape toward forward below the dollar mounting portion 114 is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window, and the glass unit locking member 190 which protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 are at appropriate positions. It is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360 Handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. The door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high security against fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and to prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Of the contact recess 181 formed in a flat plate shape covering the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and formed in an arc shape at the upper side thereof; And an after-crimping projecting piece 182 projecting rearward along the upper end. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the half after pivoting is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the half after opening is the front configuration. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail in the member 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail.

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail and the inner rail in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface, The passage portion can be prevented from striking the glass plate 594 of the ball striking or returning the ball.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and the upper extension of the front decorative member 281 An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, within the frame of the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[1-2 E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and is stored in the upper plate 301. The game balls T can be supplied to the ball hitting and launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover member 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the rear side 338a and project the front side.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls T attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; The lower ball ball pulling mechanism 350 for pulling out the gaming ball T attached to the lower surface of the lower plate 302 and stored in the lower plate 302, and mounted on the upper left side in the front view of the dish unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 And a ball rental unit 360 for operating the ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; illustration is omitted).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing the game balls T by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball T can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The height difference of the ball is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball T stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540. However, since the game ball T can not come out straight into the upper plate 301 forward from the ball ball supply port 310c, the paid out game ball T abuts on the game ball T which closed the front side of the ball ball supply port 310c. The rolling direction changes, and it is induced to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball T stored in the upper tray 301. It will be released. Thus, the game ball T can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so when the game ball T blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c, the player manually holds the game ball T It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls T paid out in the upper plate 301 without shifting the game player, and the player may feel bothersome about the storage of the game balls T on the upper plate 301. While being able to control, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game by the hitting operation of the game ball T and the game ball T which is thrown in, it is possible to control the decrease in interest to the game, The storage capacity of T can be increased.

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g due to the gaming balls T in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more The game balls T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The game ball T, which is formed to be positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, and is supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, is guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It is supposed to be

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball T is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  In addition, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. Further, the lower plate lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 It has a plate-like part that forms The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side It has become. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball T passing through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view And a ball removing passage 344c through which the game ball T can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball T stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit via the feed opening 113 and the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to 580.

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thereby, the gaming ball T stored in the upper tray 301 is transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for biasing the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 or the like Can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing off at the dividing portion 583a.

  The lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 is disposed between the lower disc side cover 330 and the lower disc lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower disc body 324 to form a bottom central portion of the disc unit 300. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the extraction base 351 and the lower tray ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower disk sphere extraction hole 324b of the lower disk body 324 And a lower disc ball extraction button 354, which is attached to the front end of the lower disc ball extraction slider 353. There is.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a which can close the lower ball ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide slider 353, or the lower opening ball slide slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, the game balls T can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc ball out slider 353 toward the back The open / close shutter 352 turns against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball T stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower tray sphere extraction button 354 is not kept pressed while being held in a state where it matches the removal hole 3324 b.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball T can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls T are put on a bowl unit when a cash or prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then the ball rental button 361 is pressed. While being able to lend (pay out) in the upper plate 301 of 300, when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount will be returned ing. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 covering the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363 and a lending remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365 and a lending ball button 361. And a return unit 362 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and a back side of the transfer unit base 366 covering the back side of the transfer unit base 366 And a rear cover 367 attached to the The crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball-sending unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball-sending unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the ball-sending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m A transparent front cover 365 having a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365 and a forwardly projecting protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and closing the display opening 310n. The loan remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301 Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. Instead, it is possible to participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; Have. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is mounted on the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is mounted on the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step 407a and the projection 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and any problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing the game balls T, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is stored in order to reliably store a large number of game balls T. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the rear handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball T is struck. It can be done. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be hit. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch power supply substrate 831 causes the rotary drive of the launch solenoid 654 to stop. It is supposed to be. As a result, the firing of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the single-shot button 520 is released before the single-shot button 520 is operated. The game ball T can be launched with a hitting strength of.

  The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotational operation of the handle main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of trouble in the joint unit, to control that the fun of the player decreases due to the hitting trouble of the game ball T Thereby making it possible.

[1-2 H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by the game ball T paid out from the award ball unit 700 to be described later The game ball T (fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite being played is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 which is open on the front side and has a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls T inside, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the cover base in communication with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of 542 toward the front as viewed from the front, and a second ball inlet 542c disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a And a second ball inlet 542c which is in communication with the second ball passage 542d and which extends downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball T An accommodation space 546 capable of accommodating a predetermined amount of gaming balls T is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball T to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of the present example is a game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It can be supplied from the outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 via the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is configured to play the game ball T supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. The lower tray 302 can be supplied from the outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 via the lower tray sphere supply rod 310h and the lower tray sphere supply port 310g of the tray unit 300.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball T fired by the hit ball launcher 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it can be received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the gaming ball T received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d ( Can be supplied).

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546, and can be pivotably covered by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. The swinging member 548 pivotally supported by 542, the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the swinging of the swinging member 548, and the swinging member 548 are biased in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 does not detect. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game balls T.

  In this example, the game balls T paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540. If the game ball T is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, the ball is stuck in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of 774 is also full, the game ball T is distributed to the full passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). The second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 from the full tank outlet 776 of the unit 770 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and the storage space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The delayed game balls T are stored. Furthermore, as many gaming balls T are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many gaming balls T are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the gaming balls T acts on the swinging member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 At the same time, the upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the gaming ball T from the winning ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126), A notification is issued to urge the player to discharge the game balls T in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball T in the housing space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the ball hitting and firing device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. T can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by the operation of the upper plate ball release button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 And a box-like front cover 581 having a ball opening 581b open on the lower side of the entrance 581a and the opening 581a and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front open And a rear cover 582 having a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction and entering from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581; A partition that is pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between front covers 581 and that divides the entrance 581a from the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581 The ball removing member 583 having the 83a and the gaming balls T on the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply opening 582a of the back cover, vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the extended axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized so as to be able to hold one game ball T. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and enters the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the game ball T to the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the gaming ball T remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one gaming ball T, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state). The received game ball T is to be sent (supplied) to the hit ball launcher 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch power supply substrate 831 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In the normal state, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball T does not intrude into the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball T entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper countersink base 344 of the dish unit 300. And is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Even if the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper ball ball slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, the ball ball 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged and the game ball It is possible to prevent T from bouncing back at the partition 583a.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in the back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud preventing member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When the vehicle is driven into the interior 1100, the incorrect gaming ball I fired by the ball striking launcher 650 travels along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, passing between the outer rail and the inner rail It tries to intrude into the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance in the passage. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, between the outer rail 1111a and the launch rail 660 without entering the game area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 605. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the gaming balls T are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5 is played When the player operates, the game ball T is sent to the hit ball launcher 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the hit ball launcher 650. The game is played in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game window 101, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or the like on the back surface of the door frame base unit 100) Since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the discharging mechanism (ball pulling member 583) is disposed, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 58 are arranged. In addition, the ball feed member 584 and the hitting and launching apparatus 650 are as close as possible, and when the game ball T in the upper tray 301 is discharged by the operation of the upper flat ball release button 341, the ball feed member 584 side The number of remaining game balls T can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased. It is possible to suppress the game ball T in the upper plate 301 disappearing prematurely by the loading operation and prevent the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game ball T at an early stage, and the game in the upper plate 301 Since it is possible to reduce the pleasure of being reduced by reducing the player's feeling that the ball T feels troublesome, it is possible to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, The pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively large (wide) in the game area 1100 and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified. With the gaming ball T, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if a problem occurs in the above, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is operated to be pressed downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate It is possible to stop the discharge of the game ball T from the box 301, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper plate ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball withdrawal) Durability of the member 583 can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the dividing portion 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper countersinking slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to collide even if it collides with the dividing portion 583a. It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 or the like from being damaged and the occurrence of a problem due to the splashing.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partitioning portion 583a is slid, the movement of the partitioning portion 583a when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partitioning portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl sphere removing button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, Similar effects can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the partitioning member 583a of the ball removing member 583 is pivoted through the pivoting collar portion 583b, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is pivoted. By dispersing the force by the portion 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating flange portion 583 b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when the gaming ball T in the upper tray 301 is ejected, the gaming ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. In the ball feeding unit 580, the game ball T can be discharged well by improving the path of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removal member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[1-2 J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2 K. Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. At the same time, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is driven to the right of the lower plate 302 in the front view right side of the lower plate 302 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the game window 101 A handle assembly 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper dish right upper decoration member 319 for decoration of the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball release button 341 can be luminously decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 59 and FIG. 60) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short playing status , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and the game ball T attached to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 When the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 Sphere blocking the flow And a mouth closing unit 790,.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side which protrudes to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the gaming panel 1112 in the gaming board 4 The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. The game balls T are received at the ball inlet 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls T to be distributed. The body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game ball T that has flowed the ball extraction passage 741d in the award ball device 740, which will be described later in detail. Is supposed to circulate.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The hit ball launcher 650 can strike the game ball T supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. It is.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end At the same time as the 658 is made passable, the game ball T can form a gap through which the game ball T can not pass, and the game ball T is held at the base end of the firing rail 660 It is possible that the ball 槌 656 (tip 658) pivots toward the firing rail 660 side than the ball hitting position where the ball can be hit at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the locking piece 662 and the ball locking piece 662 And a stopper 664 for regulating.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is in the form of a loose arc which is recessed downward substantially along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111a of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball T hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660 . The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111a, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and launching device 650 of this example jumps over the far space 626 on the left side of the front view side of the firing rail 660 and fires the gaming ball T, thereby bringing the gaming ball T into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4. It can be driven in. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. The game ball T, which has become a foul ball without being driven into the inside, drops the far space 626, is received to the far ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch power substrate 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls T to the hit ball launcher 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game balls T when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is started from that state. The ball feeding member 584 sends the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 to the side of the ball striking device 650 when it is released (OFF), so the ball feeding solenoid 585 of this ball feeding unit 580 fires the solenoid substantially simultaneously. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball 656. It is possible to

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined amounts of game balls after storing the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is paid out to the upper tray 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the instruction. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear face of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the top rear face of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls T supplied from the island equipment side. A tank rail unit 730 for aligning the gaming balls T arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending them downstream, and the gaming balls T aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 paying out based on a predetermined payout instruction and the gaming ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball T When it comes to, it is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game balls T paid out to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b And an award ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball T paid out from the award ball device 740 downward, adjacent to the award ball device attachment portion 714, And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721 and an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes in a rectangular shape only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) from the bottom wall 710 in plan view; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 , A rod-like shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a base portion of the shaft portion 725 near the base end and outer circumferential wall 722 on both front sides Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722 of the award ball tank 720, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, in the award ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to become lower toward the discharge port 723 and the gaming ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723 It is supposed to be.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and can prevent the game ball T from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, Dust and the like can be prevented from entering the tank rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls T can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 side from the discharge port 723 The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls T can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction, and the end on the left side (axial support side) in front view The bottom is inclined to lower the part. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled leftward to be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 rolling toward the discharge port 731 a A piece 735 and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game balls T in the tank rail 731 are provided. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls T discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball straightening member 727 are smoothed so as to be single-staged and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b It is possible to Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball T which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrow as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so that it becomes.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game ball T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T aligned in two rows alternate one by one It is sent to the prize ball device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the game ball T fall downward from the narrow groove It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball T comes in contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and it becomes possible to stop the game ball T being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. ing.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply that opens at the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball T, as shown. The passage 741a, the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and the rear end (open side) of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end in the rear view and bent in a substantially U shape It has a prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side of the view, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end on the right side (axially supported side) of the distribution space 741b in a back view and extending downward and opening at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and the out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of the gaming ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the gaming ball T attached to the unit base 741 circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotations, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a payout motor 744, a ball breakage switch 750, a count sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 to be attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 And.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741 a of the unit base 741 An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be removable from the unit base 741 And an attach / detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741 a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the force of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is alleviated. It is possible to Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and is present in the supply passage 741a When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball T, the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the out-of-ball switch 741e. When the gaming ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball breakage switch 741e (ball breakage state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the ball breakage is a player or the like. It is reported to the hall side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is removed. It can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a of a size that can accommodate one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotation By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, etc. is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated, or the like. 744 rotates, and a predetermined number of gaming balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side. It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls T in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout is made. The game balls T dispensed to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls T in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body The game balls T paid out to the ball removal passage 741d by 748 are the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, It is possible to discharge to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls T are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls T can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. The prize ball receptacle 771 for receiving the game ball T flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball receptacle 771 and expanded in the left and right direction (see FIG. 79) ), The normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T directly from the bottom of the winning ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball T which has flowed through the normal passage 773 A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the front end right end of the front end, and a full channel 775 for guiding the game ball T forward from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 Figure 9 and the reference), and includes full Tan passage 775 game balls T which has flowed through the full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged to the front, the.

  Furthermore, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball T that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the rear end upper portion and flows down the ball extraction passage 741 d of the prize ball device 740; The ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the gaming ball T received in the ball extraction receptacle 777 to the front side and the gaming ball T flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball at the left end in front view An outlet 774 and a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball T, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, and is usually discharged from the ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 and the dish unit 300. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 of the tray and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. There is. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball T released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base It is delivered to the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of 600.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receptacle 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the gaming ball T which has entered the prize ball receptacle 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball T, which has flowed into the passage 773, normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and the first ball outlet 544a It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the first of the far cover unit 540 The game ball T which has not been able to come out from the ball outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 is stagnated in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit The inside is full. In this state, the gaming ball T which has entered into the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter into the passage 773 and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball T enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the bowl unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540. The lower tray 302 is to be supplied.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  Thus, when the gaming ball T becomes full in the upper tray 301, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example receives the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 until the full tank is eliminated. Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball T is supplied to the ball hitting and launching device by filling the upper plate and operating the ball extraction button of the upper plate as in a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being interrupted and to stop the game ball T from being interrupted, and it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is directly below the winning ball device 740, that is, the passage of the gaming ball T paid out at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls T accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls T in the upper tray 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773 are branched. Is a game ball T that can be directly hit by the ball firing device 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the volume of the upper plate 301 and the volume of the normal passage 773. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper tray 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper tray in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball T in the main frame 3 At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame is provided with only one storage tray. Even if it is changed to 5, since the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, the time lag from payout to storage is reduced. So that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to a lack of game balls T for hitting, and to be able to cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes. It has become.

  In addition, since the gaming balls T paid out from the winning ball device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301 unless the upper tray 301 is full, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls T stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is set. It is possible to reduce the amount, and the player can concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls T, and the player is not frequently made to worry about the storage amount. While being able to play a game, without changing the main body frame 3 side, it can be made to respond to the door frame 5 provided with a different number of storage dishes, and the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full with the game ball T. Even if the game ball T does not come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 can be The amount of storage of the substantial game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray is filled with the game balls T and the game balls T can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776. Also, since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal passage 773 but also the full tank passage 775 is The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls T in each door frame 5 is not changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as many as possible and can be sufficiently adapted to different door frames 5.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls T to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball T in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount ) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount obtained by combining the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls T in the main body frame 3.

  Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and there is a problem. When it occurs, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 The flow of the game ball T can be blocked.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Because it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball T spills from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls T can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. Also, the substrate base unit 810 transfers the gaming balls T flowing down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810. It can be sent.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately provided. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed, and reaches a life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. Since the firing power supply substrate 831 (launching power supply substrate box 830) can be easily replaced when replacing the game board 4, an electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like which can realize the implantation characteristics matched to the concept of the new model to be replaced, etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the DC / DC converter 831a, it is possible to match the launch characteristics of the hitting launch device 650 previously provided in the main frame 3 with the new game board 4 it can. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball T can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model, and the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the firing power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, etc. While being able to simplify, it can exchange in a short time, and it can control that the burden on the game hall side increases. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the cost for changing the driving characteristics is reduced compared to the case where the entire dispensing control substrate 4110 is replaced. The burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they were before, so the long-term use allows When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like is deteriorated, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced to eliminate the malfunction. As well as being able to shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, it is also possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, the player It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game of.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 is opened upward at the left front of the left and right center as viewed from the front, and is discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4. A discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging, a side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) Of the power supply substrate box 850 is formed such that the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is recessed to the front side, and the front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward on the front surface of the power supply substrate box 830 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The back side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game ball T which has flowed down and the game ball T which is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and is received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail, after the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 It is possible to discharge the side downward.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  Power supply substrate box 850 and power supply substrate holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is absent. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853 It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. 86 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. It can be

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control board 4010 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 1103a of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4, the test terminal 1103b, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1103 c (see FIG. 5) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1103 facing the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and for confirmation The sealing portion 1103 d of the main control board box 1103 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. These through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and accommodate the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the effect display device 1115 on the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 4010 and the like, and heat from the peripheral control board 4010 and the like can be exhausted well. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball T, so that the gaming ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 elastically engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 and the door frame The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned with each other and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the sliding of the main frame After inserting the wedge 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing to the opening 1029 with a screw not shown.

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to make the back wall of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the section 710b and the gaming ball T discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction After the payout ball base 710 It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall 710b, and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface thereof is a tank rail unit 730 or a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball T can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from intruding into the pachinko machine 1 through the like, etc., and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball T.

[2. Configuration of the game board]
The gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to a frame-shaped front component 1111 partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and to the rear of the front component 1111. And a flat-shaped game panel 1112 for partitioning the rear end side of the game area 1100.

  The outer peripheral shape of the front component member 1111 is a quadrangle, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semicircular arc shape on the left side and a substantially U shape on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in front view. This front component 1111 forms a first inner wall portion (outer rail) 1111 a smoothly connected with the whole semicircular arc portion on the inner circumferential surface and the portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion. A second inner wall portion 1111 b is formed by connecting the remaining vertically extending portions and the lower left and right extending portions in the U-shaped portion in an L shape. In addition, the front component 1111 is a guiding wall extending in an arc along the first inner wall 1111a from the lower end (left end in front view) of the second inner wall 1111b (the left end in the front view) An (inner rail) 1111 c and a non-return piece 1111 d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guiding wall 1111 c.

  In the game panel 1112, an out port 1112 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in front view. The out port 1112 a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111 b of the front component 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111 c are connected. In addition, in the game panel 1112, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed substantially at the center of the game area 1100.

  In addition, the game board 4 includes a substrate holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the substrate holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. The main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) housed inside controls the game content, and the gaming state etc. are displayed based on the control signal from the main control board 4100 and the functions attached to the front component 1111 And a display 1114.

  Furthermore, the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game display panel 1112 and the effect display device 1115 mounted so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112 and to the rear side of the game display device 1115. And a peripheral control substrate 4010 for controlling the effect display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the substrate 4100. In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 1120 attached to the front of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1112 (see FIG. 6). And.

  The front unit 1120 is attached at a substantial center of the game area 1100 in a front view and divides the game area 1100 into left and right, and a prize hole attached to the lower side of the center article 1130. And a unit 1150.

[2-1. Center feature]
The center character 1130 is formed in a frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening of the game panel 1112. The center character 1130 releases the warp entrance 1131 to which the gaming ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left in front view, and the gaming ball T which has entered the warp entrance 1131 and opens at the lower part in the center in the horizontal direction in front view And a warp outlet 1132.

  Further, to the right of the center character 1130 in a front view, the right channel 1133 through which the game ball T can flow and the (right-handed) game ball T driven into the right channel 1133 can be passed. A gate member 1134 is provided, and a gate sensor 1135 for detecting passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 is provided.

  The right channel 1133 is an opening that is open upward below the stopper 1111e where the first inner wall 1111a and the second inner wall 1111b at the upper right corner in a front view cross in the front component 1111 A mouth 1133a, an entrance path 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, and a gate space 1133c connected to the lower end of the entrance path 1133b and having a gate member 1134 disposed at the center. The guiding path 1133 d for guiding the gaming ball T downward from the lower end of the gate space 1133 c along a part of the second inner wall 1111 b of the front component 1111 and the lower end of the guiding path 1133 d open the gaming ball T downward And an outlet 1133e for releasing into.

  In the right channel 1133, the entrance 1133a is larger than the outside diameter of the game ball T, and the entrance path 1133b following the entrance 1133a is slightly wider than the outside diameter of the game ball T at the lower end. It is formed to be narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c is greatly expanded vertically and horizontally on the lower side of the entrance path 1133b, and the gate space 1133c is formed in such a width that the game ball T can flow down on both left and right sides of the gate member 1134 disposed substantially at the center. In the gate space 1133 c, the gate member 1134 is disposed at a position slightly closer to the front in the front view than directly below the approach path 1133 b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133 c is inclined so as to be lower toward the right in the front view, and the upper end of the guiding path 1133 d is opened at the lowermost right end.

  The guiding path 1133 d extends in an arc along the vertically extending portion of the second inner wall 1111 b of the front component 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the inner wall of the guide path 1133d is provided with a plurality of projections, and the outflow velocity of the game ball T can be suppressed by contacting the game balls T with these projections. The guide path 1133 d extends downward to about half the height of the entire height of the game area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly leftward in front view.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the winning opening unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is disposed below the outlet 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center character 1130 and can receive the game ball T at all times, and the warp outlet 1132 of the center character 1130. A first start opening 1152 which is disposed on the lower side and can always receive the game ball T, and a second start opening which is disposed on the right side of the first start opening 1152 in front view and always opens into the game area 1100 A special winning opening 1154 which is disposed below the first starting opening 1152 and can be received by the game ball T by opening and closing according to the gaming state, and is disposed on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 in front view It is arranged in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 that can be received by the game ball T by opening and closing according to the gaming state, and the prize winning opening 1155, and the prize winning opening 1 And V winning hole 1156 game balls T accepted there is a receivable 55, a.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a flat base plate 1160 provided on the front surface of the game panel 1112 and mounted on the front surface of the base plate 1160, as shown in FIGS. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a flow path of the game ball T, and a transparent front mounted on the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161 An attacker unit 1200 disposed at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and provided with a large winning opening 1154 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and the front surface of the attacker unit 1200 The variable start is disposed at the upper right of the view and provided with the second start port 1153 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. A combination unit 1220 which is disposed on the right side of the opening unit 1210 and the variable start opening unit 1210 as viewed from the front and equipped with a prize winning opening 1155 and a V prize opening 1156 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 And have.

  Further, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the gaming ball T received in the first starting opening 1152 downward, and the first starting opening 1161 Ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the guide member 1163 for detecting the game ball T received in the first start opening 1152, and an LED mounted on the front side of the first start opening 1152 The first start opening decoration substrate 1165, the substrate stay 1166 supporting the first start opening decoration substrate 1165 and attached to the first start opening guide member 1163, and a base at a lower position of the attacker unit 1200 A large winning opening decoration substrate 1167 mounted on the rear side of the plate 1160 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  Further, the winning opening unit 1150 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting opening 1153 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a second starting opening. A starting opening reflector 1169 covering the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and attached to the variable starting opening unit 1210 and a rear end of the base plate 1160 at a lower position of the variable starting opening unit 1210 and a second starting opening 1153 Detects the gaming ball T attached to the second starting opening guide member 1170 and guiding the second starting opening guide member 1170 for guiding the gaming ball T received in the lower part downward. Attached to the ball detection sensor (not shown) and the rear side of the second starting opening guide member 1170, the attack solenoid 1204 of the attacher unit 1200 The first relay board 1172 relaying the connection between the start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 and the main control board 4100 and the back side of the first relay board 1172 on the rear side of the second start port guide member 1170 And a substrate cover 1173 attached.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the character unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the character unit 1220, and the character unit cover 1174, and of the character unit cover 1174 on the upper side of the character winning hole 1155. A prize winning prize decorative plate 1175 arranged on the front upper part and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a prize winning prize mounted on a prize unit cover 1174 covering the front side of the prize winning prize decoration substrate 1175 The relay of the connection between the mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the character unit cover 1174, the character prize solenoid 1225 of the character unit 1220 and the V prize solenoid 1232 and the main control board 4100 Two relay boards 1178 and the back of the character unit cover 1174 A general winning opening guide member 1179 for guiding the gaming ball T received by 1151 downward, and a general winning opening guiding member 1179 attached to the general winning opening 1151 for detecting the gaming ball T general winning combination A mouth sensor 1180 (see FIG. 126).

  The base plate 1160 of the winning opening unit 1150 protrudes forward in the upper portion of the left portion in the front view and is open at the top and the rear, and has a receiving portion 1160a forming the first starting opening 1152 and a receiving portion 1160a. An attacker opening 1160b which penetrates from the lower side to the front and back and extends to the left and right, and a large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 to be described later is inserted from the rear side A second start-up opening 1160c which penetrates back and forth and the second start-up port 1153 faces the rear side, and extends in a slit shape penetrating leftwardly from the second start-up opening 1160c to be described later The door opening 1160 d and the door opening 1160 d above the door slit 1160 d, through which the front side of the engine opening door member 1214 of the engine opening unit 1210 can pass, is the engine opening reflector 116. Comprises of a second start hole upper shelf emitting decorative unit 1160e emitted decorated on the left and right on the front side and a position by arrayed has been and second start hole LED decorative substrate 1168, the.

  Moreover, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the second starting opening upper shelf light emission decoration part 1160e, and forms the prize winning hole 1155 of the prize winning hole unit 1220A in the prize unit 1220 described later It is inserted so that the front part of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 protrudes forward from the rear side, and the prize winning hole reflector 1176 is located above the prize winning hole opening 1160 f. The character winning hole luminous decoration part 1160g which is lined up in the right and left in the front position and lighted and decorated by the LED of the character winning hole decoration board 1175 and penetrates back and forth under the character winning hole opening 1160f The ball guide member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B in the character product unit 1220, which will be described later, is inserted so as to project forward from the rear side. And the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the form of a bowl extending backward at the top of the right portion in a front view and opened upward. And a hook portion 1160i which is guided rearward and is delivered to the general winning opening guide member 1179.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front play area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a is the front surface. It is formed in the shape of a shallow box whose rear side is open. The front flow path forming member 1161 is open at the upper right and front at the upper right of the front view, and guides the gaming ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form the general winning opening 1151, and the receiving portion 1161 b A shelf-like receiving portion lower shelf portion which is separated downward by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the right side to the extension of the left side of the receiving portion 1161b from the right side to the receiving portion 1161b 1161c, a receiving portion lower right standing wall portion 1161d extending downward from the left end of the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning opening 1155, and a distance from the receiving portion 1161b to the left in front view more than the outside diameter of the game ball T The position of the game ball T from the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize winning opening unit 1220A below the jack receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c and above the prize winning opening 1155 From the lower end of the receiver left upright wall 1161e extending vertically to the upper end of the receiver left upright wall 1161e and along the upper side of the prize winning opening 1155 from the lower end of the prize winning opening 1155 And an award winning opening upper ceiling portion 1161 f extending leftward to the upper side.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered leftward from a position in contact with the left end of the prize winning opening 1155 (prize winning prize opening and closing member 1221) lower than the left end of the prize winning opening upper ceiling portion 1161 f A second winning opening area right standing wall 1161h extending vertically below the second starting opening 1153 from the right end of the winning combination left opening 1161g and the right opening of the left winning combination 1161g A second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i extends leftward so that the left side is lower from the lower end of the second starting opening area right standing wall 1161h to the left end of the front flow passage forming member 1161.

  Furthermore, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated to the left side by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161h and from the upper surface of the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g It extends leftward to a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the second starting opening lower shelf 1161i so that the left side becomes lower from a position separated downward by a distance larger than the outer diameter of T The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j disposed at a position immediately above the second starting opening 1153 and the lower end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j so as to cover the right side of the second starting opening 1153. The outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161k, the guiding piece 1161l projecting leftwardly from the second starting opening right rising wall 1161k, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j Than And a, a second start hole area left vertical wall 1161m extending vertically to a position downward from the upper position than the second start hole upper shelf portion 1161j are separated into slightly larger left.

  The winning opening unit 1150 of this embodiment includes a ball detecting sensor 1164 attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163 and a ball detecting sensor 1208 attached to the attacker unit 1200 described later. A first starting opening sensor 1190 is formed to detect the game ball T received in the box 1152. Further, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second start opening guide member 1170 and a ball detection sensor 1213 described later attached to the variable start opening unit 1210 are received in the second start opening 1153. A second starting opening sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

  Further, although the details will be described later, the winning opening unit 1150 has a special winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T accepted by the special winning opening 1154 of the attacker unit 1200 and a prize winning opening 1155 of the bonus unit 1220. It has a prize winning hole sensor 1224 for detecting the accepted gaming ball T, and a specific sensor 1239 for sensing the gaming ball T accepted at the V prize mouth 1156 of the prize unit 1220.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
The attacking unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 mainly opens in the front as shown in FIGS. Attacker lower base 1201 forming the lower part, and attacker upper base 1202 attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and attached to the base plate 1160 and forming the upper part of the large winning opening 1154, the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker A large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 supported rotatably around an axis extending in the left and right direction by the base 1202 and opening and closing the large winning opening 1154, and mounted between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 Atsushi who has a plunger 1204a which is advanced and retracted according to the game state A link member 1205 for transmitting and receiving the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 and the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 and a game ball which is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and received in the winning opening 1154 A special winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting T, a guide member 1207 attached to the lower side of the attacker lower base 1201 and guiding the gaming ball T detected by the special winning opening sensor 1206 backward, and of the upper attack carrier base 1202 And a ball detection sensor 1208 attached to the upper portion for detecting the game ball T received by the first starting opening 1152.

  The large winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a length of 4 to 6 times the length of the gaming ball T in the front-view horizontal direction and a length slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball T in the vertical direction. Is opened forward, and the opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped large winning opening opening and closing member 1203. In the special winning opening 1154, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 becomes substantially vertical, the game ball T can not be received. When the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state, it is a so-called variable winning opening that can accept the game ball T.

  The attacker lower base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and extends vertically through the bottom wall of the horizontally elongated box lower housing 1201a and the lower housing 1201a with the front and upper open. A through hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c which is formed on the lower side of the through hole 1201b and into which the large winning hole sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side of both left and right ends of the lower portion 1201a. It is formed in a U shape on the pair of bearing lower parts 1201 d arranged, the solenoid support part 1201 e formed on the rear side of the right part of the storage lower part 1201 a, and the front side of the solenoid support part 1201 e and the right side of the storage lower 1201 a The game ball T is formed on the rear side of the lower housing portion 1201a at the center in the left-right direction and the support portion 1201f. And a, a passage hole 1201g that over can penetrate vertically.

  The lower housing portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the large winning opening 1154 and is inclined so that the bottom wall is lowered toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201 d is for rotatably supporting the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with the later-described bearing upper portions 1202 b of the attacker upper base 1202. The pivotal support portion 1201 f can pivotally support the link member 1205 by inserting the pivot shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 from the upper side. The passing hole 1201 g is received by the first starting opening 1152, and the gaming ball T passing through the through hole 1202 e of the attacker's upper base 1202 passes.

  The on-adjacent base 1202 of the on-hook unit 1200 is disposed on the left and right sides of the horizontally long box-like housing portion 1202a which is disposed leftward from the center in the left-right direction and whose front and lower portions are open. A pair of bearing upper parts 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c which is penetrated back and forth on the right side of the housing upper part 1202a and into which the pivot shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and formed on the upper rear side of the housing upper part 1202a It has a sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from the upper side, and a through hole 1202e through which the game ball T can pass vertically in the right portion in the sensor support portion 1202d. .

  The upper housing portion 1202 a of the attacker upper base 1202 cooperates with the lower housing portion 1201 a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a special winning opening 1154. The pair of bearing upper portions 1202 b is for supporting the winning opening opening / closing member 1203 rotatably in cooperation with the lower bearing portion 1201 d of the lower attacker base 1201. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a pivot shaft 1205a, which will be described later, of the link member 1205. The through hole 1202 e is received by the first starting opening 1152, and the gaming ball T detected by the ball detection sensor 1208 passes.

  The big winning opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 has a flat door portion 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and a door portion 1203a And an action pin 1203c projecting rightward from a position at a lower rear position than the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side.

  The door portion 1203 a of the special winning opening / closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of closing the special winning opening 1154 formed by the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203 b are rotatably supported respectively on the lower bearing 1201 d and the lower bearing 1201 d and the upper bearing 1202 b of the upper attacker base 1202. The action pin 1203 c is inserted between a pair of actuation pins 1205 c described later of the link member 1205.

  The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 while being inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201 e of the lower attacker base 1201 so that the plunger 1204 a advances and retracts from the right end side. . The plunger 1204 a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disk-shaped tip. The adder solenoid 1204 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the biasing force of the coil spring causes the plunger 1204 a to project.

  The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a pivot shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b projecting rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the pivot shaft 1205a, and a pivot shaft 1205a. And a pair of operating pins 1205c that project forward from a position eccentric to the axis of the lens. The pivot shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the pivot support portion 1201 f of the lower attachment base 1201 and the axial hole 1202 c of the upper attachment base 1202. The engaging portion 1205 b is formed with a notch into which the disk-like tip of the plunger 1204 a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pins 1203c of the large winning opening / closing member 1203 are inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

  In the link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205b mainly moves in the left and right direction in a state where the relationship between the engagement portion 1205b and the pair of operation pins 1205c is attached to the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of operating pins 1205c are arranged to move mainly in the vertical direction. Then, the link member 1205 pivots in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the projecting state in the direction of retraction (left direction in front view).

  The guiding member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape with its upper and rear portions open, and is attached to the lower side of the through hole 1201 b in the lower attacker base 1201.

  In the normal state, the plunger 1204 a of the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment protrudes in the right direction by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operation pin 1205c of the pair of operation pins 1205c is in contact with the action pin 105c of the large winning opening / closing member 1203 from the upper side, and the flat door 1203a is erected. Large winning opening 1154 has been closed. That is, the game ball T can not be received with respect to the special winning opening 1154.

  When power is applied to the attachment solenoid 1204 by a big hit game or the like, the attachment unit 1200 moves in the left direction of the plunger 1204a and is in a state of being retracted except for the disk-like tip. By the leftward movement of the plunger 1204a, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-like tip of the plunger 1204a revolves to move in the left direction, and the link member 1205 is rotated. It rotates clockwise in a front view about the moving shaft 1205a.

  When the link member 1205 is rotated clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c is separated upward from the action pin 1203c of the big winning opening / closing member 1203. The lower operation pin 1205c abuts on the action pin 1203c from the lower side, and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is pivoted about the pivot pin 1203b so that the upper end thereof is moved forward, and the flat door portion 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the gaming ball T to the special winning opening 1154 can be received.

[2-2B. Variable start port unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 108 to 113 and the like, the variable starting opening unit 1210 of the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a second starting opening 1153 opened forward in the front right side in a front view. The second starting opening 1153 is formed in a size where only one game ball T can pass. The variable start port unit 1210 has a shallow box-like lower case 1211 open at the front and the upper, and a box-like upper case 1212 attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and having a part of the front and the lower open. A ball detection sensor 1213 attached to the lower case 1211 for detecting the game ball T received in the second start opening 1153, a start opening door member 1214 slidably supported back and forth by the lower case 1211, and the lower case A start port solenoid 1215 provided with a plunger 1215a supported between 1211 and an upper case 1212 and advancing and retracting according to the game state and transmission and reception of a plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 to transmit and receive the start port door member 1214 The slide position of the link member 1216 to slide to the It includes a slide detection sensor 1217 that knowledge, the.

  The lower case 1211 of the variable start opening unit 1210 is formed to be inclined downward from the front to the rear at the position of the right side of the upper surface, and a ball guiding portion 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T, A passage hole 1211b which penetrates up and down on the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and through which the game ball T can pass, and opens forward on the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and the ball detection sensor 1213 is inserted and supported Sensor support holes 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed at the center in the left-right direction and facing each other and extending longitudinally, and a cylindrical support pin 1211e projecting upward from the left side of the upper surface And.

  The upper case 1212 of the variable start port unit 1210 is open at the front on the right side in the front view and is open at the front and the lower, and the upper portion 1212a is inclined so that the upper wall becomes lower toward the rear. A second starting opening decoration is formed between the front end opening forming portion 1212 b forming the lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front view than the passage upper portion 1212 a in the case 1212 and the base plate 1160 formed on the upper side of the front end opening forming portion 1212 b A rear substrate holding portion 1212c for holding the substrate 1168 and the starting opening reflector 1169; a solenoid covering portion 1212d formed on the rear side of the rear substrate holding portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covering the starting opening solenoid 1215 from the upper side; Is equipped.

  The passage upper portion 1212 a of the upper case 1212 forms a second start port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211 a and the passage hole 1211 b in the lower case 1211. The passage upper portion 1212a is formed in a U-like shape with the opening directed downward, and a right side extending downward longer than the left side in a front view. Also, the passage upper part 1212a can guide the gaming ball T to the rear by cooperating with the ball guiding part 1211a.

  A front end of the front end opening forming portion 1212 b of the upper case 1212 is formed at the same position as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212 a in the front-rear direction. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212 b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) to the left from near the lower end of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a. It extends further to the left at a large angle (about 45 degrees) to the same height as the passage top 1212a, and further extends horizontally to the left from the top of the passage 1212a. It is formed in a shape extending downward to an intermediate height between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side of 1212a.

  In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape extending upward from near the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a and extending horizontally short from the upper end to the lower right It extends from the lower end of the left side of the passage top 1212a to about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and further lowers the right from there to near the lower end of the left side As it extends diagonally longer. The first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, the third guiding portion 1214c, and the like of the starting opening door member 1214 are disposed below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

  The start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 is a flat first guide 1214 a extending obliquely (at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction) toward the lower right of the front view, and a first guide A flat second guide portion 1214b which extends obliquely at an angle (about 5 degrees) smaller than the first guide portion 1214a from the right end of the right side 1214a to the lower right in front view, and the second guide portion 1214b A flat plate-like third guide portion 1214c which is provided at a position lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b on the right side than the right end and inclined downward toward the rear, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c The front wall 1214d extends to the same height as the right end of the second guide 1214b from the second guide 1214b, and the flat upright wall 12 extends upward from the right end of the third guide 1214c beyond the front wall 1214d. Includes a 4e, the.

  In addition, the start opening door member 1214 has a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guiding portion 1214b, a flat slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider A cylindrical connection pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g, and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g.

  The first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, the third guiding portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the starting opening door member 1214 have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the first guide portion 1214 a and the like is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T. In addition, the left and right length (length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) of the starting opening door member 1214 is about four times as long as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T It is done. Furthermore, the left and right length in plan view of the first guide portion 1214a is formed to be about 2/3 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T. The first guiding portion 1214 a and the second guiding portion 1214 b are disposed below the front end opening forming portion 1212 b of the upper case 1212. Further, the third guide portion 1214 c, the front wall portion 1214 d, and the standing wall portion 1214 e are disposed between the ball guiding portion 1211 a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212 a of the upper case 1212.

  The left and right ends of the slider portion 1214 g of the starting opening door member 1214 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211 d of the lower case 1211. As a result, the starting opening door member 1214 is slidably supported forward and backward by the pair of slide grooves 1211 d of the lower case 1211. The connection pin 1214 h is slidably inserted into a connection hole 1216 e of the link member 1216 to be described later, so that the connection pin 1214 h is connected to the link member 1216 to transmit and receive the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1215 a of the start port solenoid 1215. The detection unit 1214i can be detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  The start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid cover 1212 d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215 a advances and retracts from the left end side. The plunger 1215 a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. Further, the start port solenoid 1215 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the plunger 1215 a is in a projecting (extending) state by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1216 of the variable start port unit 1210 has a cylindrical main body 1216 a rotatably fitted on the support pin 1211 e of the lower case 1211 from the upper side, and a first piece 1216 b extending outward from the main body 1216 a And an engaging portion 1216c projecting upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and engageable with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215, and in the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. And a second piece 1216d extending longer than the first piece 1216b at a right angle, and extending in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extends through vertically at the tip of the second piece 1216d And a long hole-like connection hole 1216e into which the connection pin 1214h of the cage opening door member 1214 is slidably inserted from the lower side. There.

  The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends from the upper end of the main body 1216a in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216 d extends perpendicularly to the first piece 1216 b in a clockwise direction in plan view from below the first piece 1216 b in the main body 1216 a. The second piece 1216 d is formed to have a length such that its tip end is located near the center in the left-right direction of the lower case 1211 in a state in which the main body 1216 a is fitted into the support pin 1211 e of the lower case 1211.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable start port unit 1210 has a lower position than the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214. The start port solenoid 1215 is disposed laterally long on the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b above the slider portion 1214g, and the start port solenoid 1215 is further extended. At the lower side, the link member 1216 is used to transmit the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1215a to the starting opening door member 1214. As a result, the distance (size) of the variable start port unit 1210 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210 can be made relatively wide.

  In the variable start port unit 1210 of this embodiment, in a normal state (the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 protrudes leftward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the end of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and The connection hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d, which extends at right angles in the clockwise direction, is located rearward of the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the starting opening door member 1214 provided with the connection pin 1214 h inserted into the connection hole 1216 e of the link member 1216 substantially coincides with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the start-up opening door member 1214 is in a retracted state (in the non-acceptable position) from the inside of the game area 1100. In this normal state, the detection portion 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  The variable start port unit 1210 immerses the plunger 1215 a when the start port solenoid 1215 is energized according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball T passes by the gate member 1134 of the center character 1130. Move to (see Figure 113). When the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 moves rightward and retracts, the entire link member 1216 is seen in plan view centering on the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 by the engagement portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. It turns in the clockwise direction.

  By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the end of the second piece 1216d is moved so as to relatively move forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connection pin 1214h of the starting opening door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the start opening door member 1214 protrudes forward more than the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the start opening door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214 e appears in the game area 1100 (a state of an acceptable position). In a state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to appear in the game area 1100, the detecting portion 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a in the state where the start opening door member 1214 appears in the game area 1100, the game machine rolls to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b Sent up. Then, the gaming ball T sent to the second guiding portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guiding portion 1214b, and to the third guiding portion 1214c disposed on the right side of the second guiding portion 1214b. Will be sent.

  Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined to lower the rear end, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes its rolling direction in the third guide portion 1214c to the rear, From the rear end of the third guiding portion 1214c, it is sent between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 from the rear. That is, the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153. At this time, in the starting opening door member 1214, a standing wall portion 1214e having a height about half the outer diameter of the gaming ball T is provided at the right end of the third guiding portion 1214c. The game ball T rolled from the left direction to the third guiding portion 1214c abuts against the standing wall portion 1214e, and is prevented from rolling to the right than the third guiding portion 1214c. In addition, the game ball T rolled from the left direction to the third guiding portion 1214c can also be rolled backward by the guiding piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  The gaming ball T discharged rearward from the third guiding portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 disposed below the third guiding portion 1214c, and is guided to the ball guiding portion 1211a. Then, the ball enters the passage hole 1211 b opened at the rear end of the ball guiding portion 1211 a, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second starting opening guide member 1170.

  In the second starting port 1153 having such a configuration, since it is always open forward in the game area 1100 regardless of the situation of the game, apparently it can receive the game ball T looks like. However, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed above the second starting opening 1153, even though the game ball T flows downward from the upper side, it is disposed below the second starting opening 1153. The second starting opening 1153 can not be accepted unless it falls to the height of the second starting opening 1153 when falling to the second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i. That is, the second starting opening 1153 according to this embodiment is disposed in the game area 1100 in an area where the game balls T are extremely difficult to flow down.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 to the second start opening 1153 as described above. The game ball T is made to be acceptable by doing.

  That is, in the normal state (the start opening solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. It is in a state where it is in a dead position. And in the state where it is in such a sunken position, even if the gaming ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m, the gaming ball T starts up. The upper surface of the mouth door member 1214 (the first guide portion 1214 a and the like) can not be rolled, and flows down onto the second starting opening area lower shelf 1161 i disposed on the lower side as it is.

  On the other hand, when a normal hit is obtained in the normal lottery where the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134, the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 is a base plate by energizing the starting opening solenoid 1215. It will project forward than the front of 1160.

  That is, in a state where the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes forward than the front surface of the base plate 1160 (the state where the second starting opening 1153 can be received), the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left When the gaming ball T flows down between the standing wall portion 1161 m, the gaming ball T comes in contact with the upper surface (bottom surface) of the first guiding portion 1214 a (starting opening door member 1214). In this respect, since the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side is high, the game ball T is guided to the right side where the second start opening 1153 is provided by this inclination .

  Then, the gaming ball T guided to the right by the first guiding portion 1214a further rolls on the second guiding portion 1214b on the right side thereof. The bottom surface of the second guiding portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guiding portion 1214a, so the rolling speed of the gaming ball T increases slowly, but the second guiding portion 1214b is thus turned to the right The rolled game ball T further rolls to the third guide portion 1214 c on the right side thereof.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface of the third guiding portion 1214c is lowered toward the rear side where the opening as the second starting port 1153 is provided. In addition, a front wall portion 1214d is formed in front of the third guiding portion 1214c to restrict the game balls T on the third guiding portion 1214c from falling from the front, and the right side of the third guiding portion 1214c is formed. On one side, a standing wall portion 1214e is formed which abuts and regulates the game balls T from the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b so as not to flow down to the right as it is.

  Therefore, when the gaming balls T from the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b are supplied to the third guiding portion 1214c, the gaming balls T contact the front wall portion 1214d and the standing wall portion 1214e and The inclination of the bottom surface of the third guiding portion 1214c allows the opening as the second starting opening 1153 to be received while the movement is restricted.

  According to such a configuration, when the start port solenoid 1215 is energized, the start port door member 1214 moves forward and passes through the second start port opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, a second guide 1214b, a third guide 1214c, a front wall 1214d, and an upright wall 1214e project further forward than the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is released to the left from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, the second starting opening region abuts on the left standing wall portion 1161m and then the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214 It abuts on the portion 1214a, and the flow direction is directed to the right by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the gaming ball T rolls from the first guiding portion 1214a to the third guiding portion 1214c through the second guiding portion 1214b, and the inclination of the third guiding portion 1214c and the guiding piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 Thus, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second start port 1153 that is open rearward.

  When the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 according to the detection signal, and the payout is made. The control board 4110 controls the prize ball device 740 to pay out the game balls T of the number (for example, one) according to the received payout command to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is finished, the plunger 1215a which has been retracted is protruded by the biasing force of the coil spring provided in the starting opening solenoid 1215, and the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted via the link member 1216. Do. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 is thus retracted, the amount of projection of the first guide portion 1214 a and the second guiding portion 1214 b etc. protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases (starting opening door The gap between the front end of the member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 102) of the front flow channel forming member 1161 gradually increases. That is, in this case, when there is a game ball T rolling on the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b in the starting opening door member 1214, the clearance between it and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a is At a stage where the diameter of the gaming ball T is expanded, the gaming ball T will drop from the gap. However, at this time, if there is a game ball T that has reached the bottom of the third guiding portion 1214c before the gap expands beyond the diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T may be a front wall portion 1214d or a standing wall. The third guide portion 1214c receives the guidance from the portion 1214e, and the third guide portion 1214c can be received to the opening as the second start port 1153.

  As described above, the second starting opening 1153 according to this embodiment is provided as a remote island type winning opening provided at a position away from the flow-down path where the game ball T can flow in the gaming area 1100. There is. Also, by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, it is possible to appear and disappear, and among the sunk position (see FIG. 122 (a)) and the appearance position (see FIG. 122 (b)) When it is in the appearance position, it serves as a bridge passage connecting the inflow path and the second starting opening 1153 (island type winning opening), and the game ball T on the inflow path is in a direction different from the depth direction (right direction And a start-up opening door member 1214 (tonsboro-type movable member) provided so as to roll to the second start-up opening 1153 (off-island type winning opening) located in FIG.

  Therefore, since it becomes possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the game ball T until it is accepted by the second start opening 1153 (the remote island type winning opening) as the start opening door member 1214, It is possible to strictly distinguish and use properly the operation that allows the ball T to bridge and the operation that does not allow it. Thus, unlike in the conventional case where the game ball on the upper surface of the movable piece operated is spilled by inertia, a prize is rarely generated even though the operation is not permitted. It will be possible to avoid it surely.

  That is, only the bridging time shorter than the winning possible threshold time required for the game ball T on the inflow path to start rolling at the first guide portion 1214a and reaching the third guide portion 1214c. If control to energize the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting opening door member 1214 is not protruded, the second starting opening 1153 is operated although the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to make the game ball T unacceptable (unacceptable operation, disadvantageous game mode). That is, in this case, even if the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214) by the movement to the appearance position of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball T The rear end of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214) retracts before reaching the third guide portion 1214c and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow path forming member 1161. It will spill out of the gap between

  On the other hand, the bridge time is longer than the winning possible threshold time required for the game ball T on the inflow path to start rolling on the first guide portion 1214a and to reach the third guide portion 1214c. If the control for energizing the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting opening door member 1214 is projected over the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible for the game ball T to be accepted (acceptable operation, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214) is the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214). It is possible to arrive at the third guiding portion 1214c earlier than moving backward. Then, the gaming ball having arrived at the third guiding portion 1214c is received to the opening as the second starting opening 1153 by the inclination of the bottom surface of the third guiding portion 1214c. At this time, even if the third guide portion 1214c (starting opening door member 1214) is temporarily retracted, the inertia force acting on the game ball T is received by the contact with the front wall portion 1214d, The second start port 1153 can be received without falling from the third guide portion 1214c.

  More reliable winning of the game ball T to the second start opening 1153 when the start opening door member 1214 is operated only by the control of the operation time of the start opening door member 1214 and the start opening door member The more reliable non-winning of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 when operating 1214 can be used properly according to the situation of the game. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the premise that the player does not win when the start-up door member 1214 is not positioned at the appearance position only for a short bridging time.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, when the starting opening door member 1214 retracts among the front wall surface of the bed plate 1160 (game board 4), the first guide portion 1214a The portion in which the second guide portion 1214 b is stored is formed only as a small hole which can be stored therein. That is, in this case, with the amount of projection of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the like being gradually reduced by retracting the starting opening door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, etc. The game balls T rolling on the upper surface are also naturally drawn to the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4), but the game balls T thus drawn are the same as those of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) Because it will roll to the right while being pressed against the front wall side (or while being pressed harder than when resting at the appearance position), for contact with the front wall of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) It is possible to apply a brake to the speed of rolling to the right by the frictional force (or the frictional force stronger than that at the appearance position) greater than or equal to the predetermined value.

  As described above, at the stage where the starting opening door member 1214 starts to be retracted and the second starting opening 1153 is changed to a situation in which winning in the second starting opening 1153 is not preferable, Since a system for automatically braking the speed toward the second start port 1153 by the frictional force corresponding to the contact is constructed, the start port door member 1214 is retracted (from the appearance position to the sunken position). It is possible to suppress the number of gaming balls reaching the second starting opening 1153 after the displacement) is started, thereby taking non-winning when performing an operation that does not allow the bridging of the gaming balls T. Certainty will increase.

  Since the starting opening door member 1214 according to this embodiment is structured to move forward and backward, when viewed from the player (front) side, the starting opening door member 1214 is moving forward or backward. It is difficult to determine if it is. For this reason, by actually letting the gaming ball T flow down between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161 j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m, the starting opening door depends on whether or not it contacts the starting opening door member 1214. The player must recognize the advance and withdrawal of the member 1214, and the player must hit the right so that the game ball T circulates between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. The movement can be made to pay attention to the movement of the game ball T, and the player can be made to enjoy the movement of the game ball T to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the distance between the starting opening door member 1214 and the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the left side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is left The game ball T which is rolled to the left and is in contact with the second start opening area left upright wall portion 1161 m from the left end of the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and then is guided in the right direction by contacting the first guide portion 1214 a The motion of the player is a motion of making a U-turn rapidly, which can strongly attract the player's attention (see FIG. 122 (b) and FIG. 123 (b)).

  Further, in the second starting opening 1153 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 to 123 and the like, the gaming ball T is opened forward in a size that allows only one game ball to be received. The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j of the front flow passage forming member 1161 is disposed immediately above the second starting opening 1153. The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j extends left and right so that the left end is lower by about 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the higher right end is the second starting opening It is placed directly above 1153. That is, the left end side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j extends to the left side relative to the second starting opening 1153. In the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, the difference in height between the right end and the left end is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  A second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m is disposed on the left outside from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j with an interval slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T and extending vertically. The upper end of the second start opening area left erected wall portion 1161m is located about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball T above the upper end of the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, and the lower end is the second start opening The upper end of the upper shelf 1161 j extends vertically above the left end of the first guiding portion 1214 a of the starting opening door member 1214 at a distance approximately the same distance as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T than the upper left end of the upper shelf 1161 j.

  The starting opening door member 1214 is a right side of the second starting opening area left erected wall portion 1161m, and an opening at which only one game ball T can flow is opened between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and the second starting opening It is disposed below the upper shelf portion 1161 j. The length from the left end of the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 to the right end of the third guiding portion 1214c (the standing wall portion 1214e) is approximately four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T.

[2-2 C. About the special downflow passage leading to the prize product winning opening 1155 formed by the base plate 1160 and the front flow path forming member 1161]
As described above, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow passage forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front play area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a. Is provided as a shallow box having an open rear side on the front side, thereby forming a special flow-down passage of the game ball T leading to the prize winning opening 1155 with the base plate 1160.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 99, the special flow-down passage has two passages X and Y formed so as to sandwich the general winning opening 1151, and the right-handed game ball T is a passage X , Or Y, a specific rolling area (in this case, immediately above the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (such as the upper surface) at closing) which can be accepted into the prize winning opening 1155. It is formed to reach).

  However, in the passage X on the left side with respect to the general winning opening 1151, the gaming ball T flowing downward in the passage X is guided slightly to the right by the thick portion of the receiving left extension 1161e. It is formed with Also, the passage Y on the right with respect to the general winning opening 1151 also guides the gaming ball T flowing downward to the passage Y once to the left by the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c, but the receiving portion 1161b It is formed with a structure that stops movement in the left direction by abutting against a portion formed to extend vertically downward.

  According to such a configuration, the right-handed gaming ball T is not closed at least in the left direction (or in the left direction). It can be supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) which is supposed to be.

  In this respect, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 according to this embodiment is provided as a flat door portion 1221a which is inclined so that the left side and the back side are lower, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the special downfall passage, the gaming ball T passing through either of the passages X and Y is in a state where it does not have a speed in the left direction (or has only a slight speed in the left direction). It is provided so as to supply the right side portion (the uppermost stream portion of the specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) after the absence state).

  According to such a configuration, regardless of the flowing speed of the gaming ball T, the strength at the time of firing, etc., the gaming ball T reaching the right side portion of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is all left. From the state in which the velocity in the direction (initial velocity) is approximately “0”, the rolling in the left direction (more precisely, in the left back direction) is slowly started by the weight of the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time during which the game ball T stays on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), and of course, the bonus winning opening opening / closing member 1221 The speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the (door portion 1221a) can be made less likely to vary.

  And, on this, in the special flow down passage according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, rolling in the left direction is caused by the own weight on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). The game ball T that starts slowly has a structure (base plate side regulation portion 1160k, front side regulation portion 1161k) that regulates the rolling speed so that the rolling speed does not exceed a predetermined speed value due to the inclination of the upper surface. I have it.

  That is, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in a specific rolling area ) L (for example, 6 cm), the firing interval time when the game ball T is continuously hit into the game area 1100 by the ball striking device launcher 650 in response to the operation of the handle device 500 T (0.6 seconds ), And rolling in the passage such that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game balls T on the top surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than “L / 2T”. It is provided as a structure to be associated with the game ball T.

  According to such a configuration, the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is at least two or more (two or three) as long as the player continues to hit the right. The game ball can be made to exist.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 100 and FIG. 125 together, the special downfall passage left the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). A base plate side restricting portion 1160k formed as three projections that engage from the base plate 1160 side with respect to the game ball T rolling in a direction and reduce the speed thereof, and a front flow path with respect to the game ball T A front side restricting portion 1161k is formed as two projections that engage from the forming member 1161 side to reduce the speed thereof.

  Here, the base plate side regulation portion 1160k (three projections on the base plate 1160 side) and the front side regulation portion 1161k (two projections on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) are shown in FIG. It is provided in the form which opposes on both sides of the said prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) by an alternate relationship. As described above, the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is inclined so that the left side and the back side are lower.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the game ball T1, which slowly starts rolling in the direction to the far left on the top surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), is firstly the base plate 1160 side By contacting the protrusion (the base plate side regulation portion 1160k) on the right side among the three protrusions, the velocity in the left direction is reduced and also guided to the front side. That is, the inclination toward the back side of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is so loose that the base plate side regulating portion 1160k can guide the game ball T to the front side.

  The game ball T1 thus guided to the front side by the base plate side regulation portion 1160k is combined with the left tilt of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) itself, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion In the upper surface of 1221 a), rolling in the left front direction will be started slowly. Then, as a result, the velocity in the left direction is decelerated again by coming into contact with the projection (the front side regulation portion 1161k) on the right side of the two projections on the front flow path forming member 1161 side. It will be guided to the side.

  That is, according to the base plate side regulation portion 1160k (three projections on the base plate 1160 side) and the front side regulation portion 1161k (two projections on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) according to this embodiment. The game balls T1 on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) are rolled in a zigzag in the left direction while being decelerated each time by the base plate 1160 side and the front flow path forming member 1161 side It becomes possible to manage so that the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed "L / 2T". .

  As a result, while the gaming ball T1 is still rolling on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the game is fired next (in 0.6 seconds) in the form of a right strike The ball T2 (further, the game ball shot next next (after 1.2 seconds)) reaches the right side portion of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). Therefore, as long as the player continues to hit the right, at least two (two or three) game balls may be present on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. become able to.

  In addition, since it becomes possible to play a game so that at least two or more game balls T are regularly present in a specific rolling area in this manner, a plurality of games can be played each time the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened. Excellent winning performance such that the ball T can be won can be realized, and this makes it possible to give a sense of speed to the winning situation in the prize winning opening 1155.

  As will be described later, the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door 1221a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls T on the upper surface of the winning prize opening opening and closing member 1221 (door 1221a) substantially at the same time It slides in a direction (back side direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls T so as to spill out to the prize winning opening 1155. As a result, each time the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 for the game balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 regardless of the number thereof. Since it will be possible to enter all at once, it will be possible to give more sense of speed to the winning situation to the prize winning opening 1155, as well as winning (disbursing) of a single amount of prize at a time. It can be expected.

  Although not shown, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, a thick portion is formed at a portion where the above passages X and Y merge at the front flow passage forming member 1161 side. The thick portion guides the game ball T which has flowed down one of the passages X and Y to the back side, and the speed of the game ball T itself is decelerated to obtain the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion Further stabilization of the movement of the gaming ball T on the top surface of the base 1212a) is intended. In addition to the fact that the average speed of the game balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not easily vary, the right side of the winning prize opening opening member 1221 (door portion 1221a) The gaming ball T1 having reached the unit can be more reliably brought into contact with the protrusion (the base plate side regulation portion 1160k) on the right side among the three projections on the base plate 1160 side.

  According to such a special flow down passage, the game ball T which is sequentially reached by firing by the striking device firing device 650 when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is in the closed state is the prize winning opening opening / closing member It is possible to increase the number of gaming balls T which are made to be waiting for winning to the prize winning opening 1155 by staying at the upper surface (specific rolling area) of 1221 (door portion 1221a) with the lapse of time. It will be.

  In the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the gaming ball T first reaching a specific rolling area is the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). The two game balls are provided so as to have reached a specific rolling area by the time the left roll ends in the left direction. Therefore, the number of gaming balls T in the waiting for winning state to the prize winning opening 1155 can be increased up to three as time passes.

  By the way, the game ball T (the game ball T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221), which is thus waiting for winning to the prize winning opening 1155, has the above-mentioned prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 opened. At the same time, the player wins a prize to the prize winning opening 1155 so as to fall from the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221.

  According to such a configuration, as long as the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 operates to the open state, even if the operation time is very short, the game ball T that is in the waiting for prize state It becomes possible to enter into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. In addition, since the game ball T (the game ball T in the wait-for-winning state) which has already been fired will automatically enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155, the prize winning hole The timing at which the game ball T enters the internal area 1155 can be controlled more accurately. In other words, it is possible to accurately control the winning period as well as eliminating the possibility of non-winning to the winning combination 1155 by opening control in the presence of the game ball being put in waiting for winning It will be.

[2-2D. Schematic Configuration of Feature Unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the winning opening unit 1150 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. The character unit 1220 includes a character prize opening 1155 that can be received by the game ball T according to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball T to the first start port 1152 and the second start port 1153. The game ball T received by the prize winning opening unit 1220A and the prize winning opening 1155 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is provided so as to be able to flow down the internal area thereof, and the gaming sphere T can be received by distribution. And a V winning opening unit 1220 B having a V winning opening 1156.

[2-2D1. Prize winning hole unit]
The prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize unit 1220 supports the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 for opening / closing the prize winning opening 1155 and the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 slidably in the front-rear direction and the prize winning for prize Upper housing 1222 which divides left and right ends of mouth 1155, lower housing 1223 which is attached to the lower side of upper housing 1222 and receives gaming balls T received in prize winning opening 1155, and lower housing 1223 A prize hole sensor 1224 for detecting the game ball T received by the prize hole 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and advancing and retracting according to the gaming state Prize winning solenoid 1225 and plunger 1225 of prize winning solenoid 1225 The link member 1226 which slides the role entry prize winning opening and closing member 1221 by transmitting the advance and withdrawal of the character, and the open / close detection sensor 1227 which detects the opening and closing of the title feature prize port 1155 by detecting the movement of the link member 1226 There is.

  The prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is a flat door part 1221a which extends in the longitudinal direction with a constant width and is inclined so that the left side in the front view is low, An extending piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end in the left-right direction center of 1221a, and a connecting hole 1221c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 1221b and extending laterally .

  The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A has a box shaped upper housing main body 1222a with the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 placed on the upper surface and the lower side opened, and the front from the left and right ends of the front end of the upper housing main 1222a A pair of flat plate-like partition pieces 1222b protruding to the top and bottom and front and back, and formed on the left and right ends of the upper front of the upper housing main body 1222a, the door 1221a left and right ends of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 A pair of groove-shaped first supports 1222c slidably supporting the opening 1222d, and an opening 1222d vertically extending through the upper housing main body 1222a between the pair of first supports 1222c; An extension piece formed on the upper rear portion of the upper housing main body 1222a and used for the prize product opening / closing member 1221 A groove-shaped pair of second support portion 1222e of the left and right ends of 221b slidably supported, and a. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b coincide with each other.

  The lower housing 1223 of the prize product winning opening unit 1220A is in the form of a box whose upper side is open and extends left and right in the front housing of the upper housing body 1222a of the upper housing 1222 with the same length as the distance between the pair of partition pieces 1222b. The ball receiving part 1223a which becomes lower toward the left and lowers backward near the left end, the notch part 1223b formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving part 1223a and through which the game ball T can pass, and the notch part 1223b Sensor support part 1223c which is formed on the rear side and lower side and has a shallow box shape opened on the upper side and into which the prize winning hole sensor 1224 is fitted, and vertically penetrating at the bottom wall of the sensor support part 1223c It is formed on the right rear side of the discharge port 1223d through which the game ball detected by the winning opening sensor 1224 can pass and the ball receiving portion 1223a. And a link member 1226 which is formed on the left side of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e (the central rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a) of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e. And a link accommodating portion 1223 f rotatably accommodated.

  The prize winning solenoid 1225 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a moves forward and backward from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. The prize winning solenoid 1225 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the plunger 1225a is in a projecting (extending) state by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1226 of the prize product winning opening unit 1220A is pivotally supported at the bottom of the link accommodating portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends left and right, and the upper housing 1222 from the pivot shaft 1226a. A band plate-like flange 1226b extending to the upper side of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a through the opening 1222d and a columnar extending to the left and right at the upper end of the flange 1226b A connecting portion 1226c inserted from the lower side into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 and a tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 that protrudes rightward at a lower position from the upper and lower centers of the collar 1226b Between the engaging portion 1226d, and the engaging portion 1226d of the collar 1226b, and the pivot shaft 1226a. And a, a detection piece 1226e detected by and close detection sensor 1227 extends to put al rearward.

  In the prize product winning opening unit 1220A of this embodiment, the plunger 1225a of the prize product solenoid 1225 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of the coil spring in a normal state (during non-energization), and the tip of the plunger 1225a The hook portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is in a state of being erected substantially vertically from the pivot shaft portion 1226a by the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 engaged therewith. In this state, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 provided with the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pressed forward by the connecting portion 1226c through the connecting hole 1221c. As a result, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides forward.

  Thereby, the door portion 1221a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 protrudes forward more than the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a of the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end It is in position. Further, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b which are separated to the left and right of the upper housing 1222. Therefore, the prize winning opening 1155 opened upward is closed by the door 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, and the game ball T can not be received (FIG. 124 (b ) Etc.). In this state, the game ball T which has flowed down on the door 1221a rolls leftward according to the door 1221a inclined so that the left side becomes lower and is discharged leftward from the left end of the door 1221a Ru. In the state where the prize winning opening 1155 is closed by the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is in a state of being detected by the open / close detection sensor 1227.

  When the prize winning solenoid unit 1220 is energized in response to the special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball T in the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153, the winning combination winning opening unit 1220A is a plunger 1225a. Move backward to immerse. As the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move rearward. As a result, the link member 1226 pivots about the pivot shaft portion 1226 a in such a direction that the upper end of the collar 1226 b moves rearward. And since the connection part 1226c of the upper end of the collar part 1226b will move back, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 will slide back via the connection hole 1221c in which the connection part 1226c is inserted. .

  At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip end of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has a length (height) of the flange portion 1226b extending from the pivot shaft portion 1226a. The connection portion 1226c at the upper end of the collar portion 1226b is largely moved rearward with respect to the amount of movement of the plunger 1225a to the rear because the rotation shaft portion 1226a is disposed rather than the center. Therefore, the front end of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear end of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the prize winning opening 1155 It is opened upward to be able to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In the state where the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the open / close detection sensor 1227.

  When the game ball T is accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is retreated and the prize winning opening 1155 is opened and can be received, the gaming sphere T is It flows down between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223 and rolls left on the ball receiving portion 1223a by the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. The lower housing is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 1224 which is discharged rearward from the notch 1223b on the left end rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a and supported on the lower side behind the notch 1223b. It is discharged onto the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, which will be described later, of the lower V pay-port unit 1220B from the discharge port 1223d of 1223.

  However, although it will be described later, in the prize winning opening unit 1220A according to this embodiment, when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the open state, the prize winning to the prize winning opening 1155 The game ball T having entered the inner area is detected by the item winning hole sensor 1224 than the global entry time required for all the game balls T in the waiting state to enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. It is formed with an internal passage which takes longer to reach the desired position. In this way, a detection spot where the game ball T that has entered the internal area is subjected to the closing judgment (the upper limit judgment on the number of game balls T that can be won) of the closing of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) Before all the game balls T that are in the prize waiting state finish entering before the game reaches the goal, the plurality of game balls T that are in the prize waiting state for the prize winning opening 1155 are added In combination with the above-mentioned configuration that is generated creatively, it becomes possible to actively generate an overflow winning for the upper limit value of the gaming ball T that can be won, dynamic winning performance exceeding the set value, award winning performance Can be realized.

[2-2D 2. V winning opening unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the prize unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the prize winning opening unit 1220A, and a unit front base 1230 in which a V prize opening 1156 is formed, and a unit front base 1230 Unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side of the unit, a V prize solenoid 1232 having a plunger 1232a held between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and advancing and retracting in accordance with the gaming state, and the unit rear base 1231 Drive gear member 1233 rotatably supported by unit front base 1230 on the rear side and rotated by advancing and retracting plunger 1232a of V prize solenoid 1232; driven gear member 1234 meshing with drive gear member 1233; driven gear member 1234 The back end is attached to the center of the Front while being rotatably supported by and unit before the base 1230 is provided with a shaft member 1235 which projects forward from the unit before the base 1230.

  In addition, the V winning opening unit 1220B is disposed on the front of the unit front base 1230 and attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a that can receive only one game ball T on the circumferential surface. It is attached to the front of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, the disk-like rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front of the rotating body 1236, and the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 And a ball guiding member 1238 for guiding the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223 d of the mouth unit 1220 A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guiding the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning hole 1156. .

  Further, the V prize opening unit 1220 B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, a pair of specific sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received by the V prize opening 1156. A V loss sensor 1240 for detecting the game ball T which is not received in the V winning hole 1156 after being installed and received in the prize winning hole 1155, and mounted on the rear side of the unit rear base 1231 and rotating body 1236 And a rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the camera.

  The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and a front portion 1230a and a central portion of the front portion 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b for rotatably supporting the shaft member 1235, and a hole 1230c for penetrating the game ball T on the upper side of the bearing hole 1230b. .

  Also, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a, and guides the game ball T received the V winning hole 1156i downward to the first discharge path 1230d whose rear side is open, and the front surface portion 1230a. It is formed on the upper side of the first discharge path 1230d by the second discharge path 1230e, which is formed on the rear surface and guides the gaming ball T passing through the missing hole 1230c downward and the rear side is opened, and the rear surface of the front portion 1230a And a solenoid accommodating portion 1230 f in which the cage V prize solenoid 1232 is accommodated. A pair of specific sensors 1239 are attached in the first discharge path 1230 d. Further, a V loss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge passage 1230 e. The open rear sides of the first discharge path 1230 d, the second discharge path 1230 e, and the solenoid accommodating portion 1230 f are closed by the unit rear base 1231.

  The V prize solenoid 1232 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 such that the plunger 1232a advances and retracts from the lower end side. The plunger 1232 a of the V prize solenoid 1232 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. Further, the V prize solenoid 1232 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232 a in a protruding direction, and the plunger 12 32 a is in a state of protruding downward when not energized by the coil spring.

  The drive gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220 B extends in the front-rear direction, and has a shaft 1233 a rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a flat plate extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the shaft 1233 a. An extension piece 1233b, a drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and a front end of the extension piece 1233b And an engaging portion 1233 d engaged with the tip end of the plunger 1232 a of the solenoid 1232.

  The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and engages with the driven gear of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a. And a detection piece 1234b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a. The arc-shaped driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 has a pitch diameter that is about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the arc-shaped driving gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233. There is.

  The rotary body 1236 of the V prize winning opening unit 1220B is formed in a state in which a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T is opened forward and outward. In the front view, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 extends in the direction in which two sides (two sides separated in the circumferential direction) from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side move away from each other as it goes to the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a in a front view on the left side. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of the rotary body 1236 is formed to be about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T.

  Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed so that the outer diameter from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the gaming ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In the receiving portion 1236a, the rear wall is cut away from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side, and is formed lower than two sides separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a is provided with an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inner side) of the rear wall, which is inclined obliquely backward as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis), The game balls T flowing down from above contact the inclined portions 1236b, thereby guiding the game balls T forward and making it easy to receive them into the receiving portion 1236a, and when receiving the game balls T, the receiving portion 1236a The impact that acts on the bottom of can be mitigated. Further, the open front end side of the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Thus, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can make the game ball T enter and leave only from the radially outer side of the rotating body 1236.

  The ball guiding member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting off the cylindrical peripheral wall 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and the upper portion of the peripheral wall 1238a, and an upper opening through which the game ball T can pass The right side opening 1238c is formed by cutting out the right side portion 1238b and the right side portion (a position at an angle of 90 degrees clockwise with respect to the upper opening 1238b) of the peripheral wall 1238a. A ball inlet 1238d disposed immediately below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the prize winning hole unit 1220A above the peripheral wall 1238a and opening upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d to the top opening 1238b An upper guiding portion 1238e which is lowered in a crank shape and bent like a crank so that the game ball T can be distributed, and a right opening 123 Front view lower right V game ball T has become lower toward the winning opening 1156 is provided with a right guiding section 1238f allowing flow c. From

  The rear end sides of the upper guiding portion 1238 e and the right guiding portion 1238 f are open in the ball guiding member 1238, and the ball guiding member 1238 is attached to the unit front base 1230 to close the rear end side opened by the front portion 1230 a.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is rotatably supported at a position near the right end in the front view on the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly above the vertical center. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached at a position slightly left from the center in the front view in the unit front base 1230. The drive gear 1233 c of the drive gear member 1233 is engaged with the driven gear 1234 a of the driven gear member 1234 between the shaft portion 1233 a of the drive gear member 1233 and the shaft member 1235, and the V prize solenoid 1232 is disposed. It is done.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B, a V winning opening 1156 opens forward at a position directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 below the center of the rotating body 1236.

  Energization / non-energization of the V prize solenoid 1232 is performed in a constant cycle by the control of the main control board 4100. When the V-payout solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232 a is protruded downward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233 d of the drive gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232 a which protrudes downward, and the drive gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft portion 1233 a, In the vicinity of the end in the clockwise direction in the front view of the gear 1233c, it meshes with the vicinity of the end in the counterclockwise direction of the driven gear 1234a in the driven gear member 1234 (see FIG. 120B). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 extends upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is in the state detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

  The rotating member 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 by the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 at the rear end faces the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right in front view It is in the state of the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the right opening 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a erected state. The upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

  Thus, when the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f. The gaming ball T received in the V winning hole 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230 d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230 and is detected by the pair of specific sensors 1239, and the lower end of the first discharge path 1230 d It is discharged downward from the

  On the other hand, the gaming ball T which is received by the prize winning opening 1155 of the prize winning opening unit 120 B and reaches the upper mouth 1238 b through the ball inlet 1238 d and the upper guiding portion 1238 e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from being received, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 which is inclined so that the rear end side is narrowed opens at the rear side of the lower portion of the upper guiding portion 1238e While entering the missing hole 1230c of the front portion 1230a of the unit front base 1230 and being guided downward by the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, it is detected by the V loss sensor 1240, and the second discharge path 1230e It is discharged downward from the lower end of the

  In a state where the V-payout solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232 a is raised to be immersed against the biasing force of the coil spring. When the plunger 1232a is raised, the drive gear member 1233 is rotated clockwise in a front view centering on the shaft portion 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. When the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the entire driven gear member 1234 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the shaft member 1235 by the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 engaged with the drive gear 1233c. Rotate. Thus, the rotating body 1236 mounted on the front end side of the shaft member 1235 is also turned 90 degrees counterclockwise in a front view through the shaft member 1235 whose rear end side is mounted on the driven gear member 1234. Become.

  Then, when the rotating body 1236 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the receiving portion 1236 a is opened upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236 a coincides with the upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. As a result, the receiving portion 1236a is in communication with the upper guiding portion 1238e through the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120 (a)).

  With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 directed upward, when the gaming ball is discharged from the prize winning opening unit 1220A side and enters the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, it passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and the upper portion It is received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 from the port 1238 b. When the game ball enters the ball inlet 138b with the game ball T being received by the receiver 1236a of the rotor 1236, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guide 1238e and receives the rotor 1236. It comes in contact with the game ball T received by the part 1236a from above, enters into the backward hole 1230c, and is discharged downward through the second discharge part 130e of the unit front base 1230. Ru.

  At this time, the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and may come off from the receiving portion 1236a even if the gaming ball T contacts from above Absent. Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center of the upper guiding portion 1238e in the front-rear direction) is formed slightly behind the center of the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Because, by this, another game ball T coming from behind comes in contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a, so another one that has been in contact from above The gaming ball T can be guided to the rear with the lost hole 1230c, and another gaming ball T, which comes later, can be reliably discharged downward from the lost hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of gaming balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a), first, the game supplied first among the gaming balls The ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a. And about each game ball supplied after this, it comes to enter into the lost hole 1230c in the form guided by contact with the game ball held by the receiving part 1236a (V loss sensor 1240 Detected by On the other hand, when the rotating body 1236 operates from the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (b), the gaming ball held by the receiver 1236a The holding is released and the game enters the V winning opening 1156 (detected by the specific sensor 1239).

  On the other hand, when a plurality of gaming balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (b), all of the gaming balls are guided by contact with the rotating body 1236. It enters into the lost hole 1230c (detected by the V loss sensor 1240).

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position along the way. A center character 1130 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center character 1130.

  Further, behind the center character 1130, an effect display device 1115 is provided which displays effects with a large area in a front view so as to attract attention from the player. As the effect display device 1115, a suitable display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1115.

  On the other hand, from the right area to the lower area of the center role 1130 in the game area 1100, the gate member 1134, the general winning opening 1151, the special winning opening 1155, the second starting opening 1153, the first starting opening 1152, and the large winnings A mouth 1154 is provided. However, among these, the first starting opening 1152 is provided so that only the game ball T which has flowed down the left side area of the center character 1130 can be made winning possible, and the big winning hole 1154 is the left side of the center character 1130 Even if it is the game ball T which flowed down any of a field and a right-hand side field, it is provided so that it can be won.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls T stored in the plate unit 300 are played one by one (every 0.6 seconds). It can be driven into the upper part in the region 1100. The game balls T driven into the game area 1100 flow down so as to pass either the left or right of the center character 1130. As a result, when winning in any winning opening, the game balls T of the number according to the accepted winning opening are paid out to the dish unit 300, but none of the winning openings did not win. In this case, the game is discharged from an out port 1112a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. The game balls T discharged from the out port 1112a, the general winning port 1151, the first starting port 1152, the second starting port 1153, the special winning port 1154 and the prize winning port 1155 are not returned to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 opened in the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 1130, the opening is in the lower part in the center of the center accessory 1130 in the lateral direction. It is released again into the game area 1100 from the warp exit 1132. The first starting opening 1152 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward directly under the warp outlet 1132, and the gaming ball T released from the warp outlet 1132 has an extremely high probability of the first starting aperture. It is supposed to be accepted by 1152.

  Here, the game ball can always be received in the first start opening 1152 at the approximate center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and below the effect display device 1115. When the game ball enters the first start opening 1152, the first start opening sensor 1190 (FIG. 126) detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. At this time, if it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the main control board 4100 is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A first special symbol lottery (first special judgment) is performed on a hit (small hit, big hit) serving as an opening trigger of the winning combination 1155 or the large winning opening 1154 based on the random number for one special symbol. The first special symbol dynamically displayed on one special symbol display 1185 (FIG. 126) is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The first special symbol display 1185 is provided, for example, as a part of the function display 1114.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the bonus symbol solenoid 1225 of the below-mentioned attacker drive mechanism 2121 (refer to FIG. 126) has a pattern according to the type of the small hit. Energize and open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the below-mentioned attachment drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) is energized in a pattern according to the type of the big hit. The big winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game). And, after the big hit game is played, it can be controlled to shift to the time saving game state described later where improvement of the easiness of accepting the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 is achieved.

  Although described later, when the ball entry (winning) of the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 1190, the main control board 4100 also transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 126). Do. That is, in this case, in the payout control board 4110, the game balls T of the number (for example, three) according to the received payout command are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows downward from the top of the center character 1130 (right-handed), the entry into the right flow channel 1133 from the entrance 1133 a Then, the game liquid is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 in the vertical direction. Below the outlet 1133e, a general winning opening 1151 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward.

  Then, when the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 according to a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 4110 has a number (for example, 10) corresponding to the received payout command. The game balls T are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T that has flowed down the right side of the center character 1130 and has not been accepted by the general winning opening 1151 plays a role through the left or right of the receiving portion 1161 b of the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door 1221 a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 closing the prize winning opening 1155 of the thing unit 1220. And game ball T which flowed down on the upper surface of the door 1221a rolls the upper surface of the door 1221a to the left under the prize winning opening upper sky wall 1161f, and from the left end of the door 1221a, the prize winning opening It rolls on the upper surface of the left shelf 1161 g and is discharged from the left end of the left winning combination prize shelf 1161 g to the lower left.

  Then, the game balls T released from the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g flow down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and roll the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j to the left, It is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the lower left. The game ball T released from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j abuts on the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m on the left side thereof, and downward along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m Flow down. The game ball T, which has flowed down along the right side of the second start opening area left upright wall portion 1161m, flows down onto the second start opening area lower shelf 1161i, and the upper surface of the second start opening area lower shelf 1161i is leftward. After rolling to the left, it is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i to the lower left so as to pass through the front surface of the large winning opening 1154.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is received (passed) to the gate member 1134 in the right channel 1133, it is detected by the gate sensor 1135 (see FIG. 126) described later. At this time, if it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the regular (for example, every 4 ms) periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range Based on the random number for the symbol, determination processing (normal determination) is performed on the normal hitting that triggers the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 as the movable piece, and the dynamic display is performed on the normal symbol display 1189 (FIG. 126) The normal symbol to be displayed is changed and displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal hit is won, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of the common prize product drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 126) described later that is configured to have the start port solenoid 1215 etc. is performed. By this, the movement to the appearance position of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed.

  However, as described above, the second starting opening 1153 and the starting opening door member 1214 according to this embodiment receive the game ball T in the second starting opening 1153 even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed. It is provided with the structure which is not always permitted (island type winning opening, tonboro type movable member).

  That is, in the second starting opening 1153 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed in accordance with the winning of the normal hit, the bridging time is shorter than the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time If the game ball can not cross over the top surface of the starting opening door member 1214 if it is only performed, the second starting opening 1153 can not be received. Therefore, the second start port 1153 according to the present embodiment crosses over the upper surface of the start port door member 1214 only when the operation by the start port door member 1214 is projected for a time longer than the winning allowing threshold time. It is possible for the game ball T to be accepted.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, even when it is normally hit by the normal determination, the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 is based on the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time Even short bridge times are selected. As described above, by completely excluding the possibility of the game ball T being accepted by the second starting opening 1153 being completely cut off when the starting opening door member 1214 is in the normal gaming state, the second starting opening 1153 side is The lottery can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bridge is longer than the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 when the normal hit is won in the time judgment state. Be sure to choose the time. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the player can hit the game ball in the right area of the center character 1130 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), which is the second side of the extremely advantageous game condition. It becomes possible to enjoy the game (second special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the starting opening 1153. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second start opening 1153 is higher when the game is hit in the right than the probability that the game ball is accepted in the first start opening 1152 when hit in the left It has been

  When a game ball is received in the second start port 1153, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by a second start port sensor 1191 (see FIG. 126) described later. At this time, if the predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, the prize winning a prize based on the random number for the second special symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special judgment) is performed on the hits (small hit, big hit) serving as opening triggers for the mouth 1155 or the big winning opening 1154, and the second special symbol display 1186 (FIG. 126) is dynamically The second special symbol displayed is changed and displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol display 1186 is provided as a part of the function display 1114, for example.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the bonus symbol solenoid 1225 of the below-mentioned attacker drive mechanism 2121 (refer to FIG. 126) has a pattern according to the type of the small hit. Energize and open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the below-mentioned attachment drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) is energized in a pattern according to the type of the big hit. The big winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game).

  Here, in the small hit game, the V prize solenoid 1232 is de-energized in a state where any of the gaming balls entered into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 When the rotary body 1236 rotates clockwise, the gaming ball received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotary body 1236 is guided to the V winning hole 1156. That is, the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment causes the big hit game to be started also when the specific sensor 1239 detects that the game ball has been accepted in the V winning opening 1156, in addition to winning the big hit. In order to achieve this, control is performed to open and close the special winning opening 1154 in a predetermined pattern.

  In the big hit game, the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the big winning opening 1154 is opened, or that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the big winning opening 1154 When the opening and closing control pattern for controlling the large winning opening 1154 in the closed state is set as a round game for one round, this round game is executed so as to be repeated for the number of rounds according to the type of "big hit" It will be.

  When the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 1154 or the prize winning opening 1155 while these games are being performed, the main control board 4100 receives the result of the detection by the big winning mouth sensor 1206 or the special winning prize sensor 1224. A payout command is sent to the payout control board 4110 based on the above. As a result, the payout control board 4110 pays out the gaming balls of the number (for example, 10) according to the received payout command to the dish unit 300.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the display by the function display 1114, the peripheral control board 4010 makes various effect images on the effect display device 1115 based on a command from the main control board 4100. The display is made so that the player can be entertained.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a big hit game in the second special symbol lottery as the above-mentioned advantageous game condition that can be set for the lottery on the second starting opening 1153 side. The probability of getting the hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) to be started will be 10 times higher than the probability to get the hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game in the first special symbol lottery It is supposed to be set to

  That is, in this case, when the bridge time longer than the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time is selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, in the short game state, the lottery about winning (big hit, advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game Will be performed under high probability (second special symbol lottery).

  Moreover, with regard to the random number (high probability start information) for the second special symbol acquired on the second start opening 1153 side, a bridge time longer than the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time is selected as the operation time of the start opening door member 1214 Although it is acquired and made storable only when being played (when in the short game state), the memory itself is a predetermined number (the number of reserved second special symbols even after it is finished) Is able to be held up to 4).

  Therefore, by holding the random number for the second special symbol (high certainty start information) as a hold on hold up to a predetermined number before the time saving game state ends, the number of holdings is the normal game Since it becomes possible to carry out the lottery while the probability of winning a big hit game being started is increased after being controlled to the state, the decline in the fun of gaming when the short time gaming state ends Can be suppressed.

  Further, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the type of prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) as its type It is an advantageous small which can start a big hit game only if it plays a game (continues a right-handed game) so that the state (waiting prize state) in which the game ball is present on the upper surface (specific rolling area) is maintained. The hit has always been chosen.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, a small hit as a result of the second special symbol lottery being performed based on the random number for the second special symbol (high probability start information) If a small hit is obtained, control is performed to promote winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 until the opening period of the winning combination 1155 corresponding to the small touch is over. . That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to start the big hit game after securing the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery up to the upper limit value, it is controlled to shift to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is played. Even if it is the case, it will be possible to carry out the drawing for the number of the held, with the probability of getting a hit to start the big hit game being increased after being controlled to the normal gaming state. .

  Also, although this will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the second special symbol lottery (the side of the game where the probability of getting a hit to start a big hit game is increased) As a result, after the big hit game is played, it is decided to end once without continuing the short time game state. On the other hand, after the random number for the second special symbol (high certainty start information) is left on hold before the time saving game state ends, and after the transition control to the normal game state is performed. After a big hit game is played as a result of the second special symbol lottery (the game on the side where the probability of getting a hit to start a big hit game is increased is high) which has already been put on hold, Transition control to the state is made to be controlled again.

  That is, in this case, even if the transition to the time saving game state is controlled, a big hit game is played as a result of the second special symbol lottery at a relatively early stage, and it is almost determined that the time saving game state is temporarily ended. (In the second special symbol lottery, there is a probability that it is more than 10 times higher than the probability obtained for hitting the big hit game in the first special symbol lottery). Therefore, when winning in a hit to start the big hit game while in the normal gaming state, from the sense of the player side, it will be transition control to the big hit game and time saving game state at the time of the corresponding election, it will be obtained immediately The two big hit games with the big hit game that is expected are to be provided as a set of big hit games.

  In the time saving game state, the fluctuation time of the symbol according to the result of the lottery is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state (so-called shortening fluctuation).

  And each time a set of big hit games (two big hit games) is offered in this way, the normal gaming state is returned, but in the normal gaming state, the second state is put on hold when in the time saving state. It is possible to digest the special symbol lottery (the game on the side where the probability of getting a hit to start the big hit game is increased). That is, even in the normal gaming state, it becomes possible to digest the game (second special symbol lottery) on the side where the probability of getting a hit to start the big hit game is increased, by the number of holdings, If it is won to start the big hit game until the end of the digestion for a few minutes of the hold, or if it can be controlled to shift control to the short time game state again (one set of big hit games (two big hit games Can be started again)), it will be possible to enjoy the novel playability.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability of obtaining an advantageous small hit in the second special symbol lottery is "1/6", and the upper limit value of the number of reservations in the second special symbol lottery is Since it is "4", in the normal gaming state where the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is provided, in the normal gaming state, the four second special symbol lotterys already on hold are digested The probability of winning a jackpot game start during the interval is “671/1296” (= 1− (5/6) 4) even if the probability of winning a jackpot is excluded.

  In this way, the above-described one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) can be looped with a probability of 50% or more with a capability (basically, the ability to continue the advantageous state) In the normal gaming state, including the period until the suspension of the second special symbol lottery is finished, let the period after the transition control to the time saving gaming state be positioned as a special gaming state advantageous to the player Will be able to According to such a special gaming state, whenever it succeeds in continuing the special gaming state with a probability of 50% or more (in the normal gaming state, the four second special symbol lotterys which are on hold will be digested) In the meantime, every time you start winning a big hit game, you will be able to get the amount of prizes according to the 2 big hit games, so a game with significantly better award winning performance than before It will be possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

  However, while offering a set of big hit games (two big hits games), the result of the first special symbol lottery (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) when in the time-saving game state If there is a case where a big hit game corresponding to is started, it will be controlled again to the short game state after the big hit game (see FIG. 141). That is, in this case, at least three big hit games will be performed including the big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the fun of gaming by such a premium game. It will be. In addition, in the big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery (first big hit, first advantageous small hit), it is possible to obtain only about 400 game balls in general, such as Even if a premium game is realized, if the game on the first special symbol lottery side is daringly advanced while in the short time game state, the player side is penalized and no load is generated on the hall side. It is supposed to be.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the upper surface (specificity of the winning feature opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) as its type In order to maintain the state where the game ball is present (waiting state for winning) in the rolling area of the game, it is necessary to play the game (continue the right-handed game), and the advantageous small hit which can start the big hit game As described above, it is selected.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a principle that can start a big hit game when an advantageous small hit is obtained will be described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the upper surface (specific) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state as long as the player continues right strike A structure is adopted in which it is possible to keep at least one or more gaming balls (here, two or three) in the rolling area). On the other hand, when at least one or more game balls are present on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state, the prize winning opening is opened. When the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) operates to the open state, the game balls fall from the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 It is supposed to enter.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation time is extremely short as long as the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 operates to the open state, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion It becomes possible to make the game ball (the game ball in the waiting for winning state) existing on the upper surface of 1221 a) enter into the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155. In addition, the game balls (game balls waiting for winning) that have already been fired will automatically enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155, so It is possible to more accurately control the timing at which the game ball enters the inner area.

  At this point, although it will be described later, in the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155, it operates so that a certain distribution operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears from a specific timing (here, the timing of symbol stop). A rotary body (sorting device) 1236 capable of guiding the gaming ball having entered the internal area to either of the V winning hole 1156 and the missing hole 1230c is provided. That is, for such a distributing operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the V winning hole can be controlled more accurately while the timing at which the gaming ball enters the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155 can be more accurately controlled. The prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed so that the waiting for winning state of the gaming ball is released aiming at the timing of being guided to 1156 (the timing when the gaming medium is guided to the specific area). It is supposed to operate from the state to the open state.

  It should be noted that when such a small hit is obtained, the timing of entry by the gaming ball into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately for such a sorting operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 Among them, the prize winning opening opening and closing member so that the game ball waiting state of the gaming ball is canceled aiming at the timing not to be guided to the V winning opening 1156 (missing timing when the gaming medium is not guided to the specific area) It will operate 1221 (door part 1221a) from a closed state to an open state.

  According to such a configuration, even when the result of the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous small hit, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning feature opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) As long as the game is continued (right-handed game is continued) so as to maintain the state in which the ball is present (waiting for winning), the rotating body (swinging down (see FIG. 142 (e)) performs a certain sorting operation. Minute device) the game ball enters into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 at the correct timing guided to the V winning opening 1156 by 1236, so the big hit game according to the acceptance to the V winning opening 1156 Can be started (big hit control). Thereby, it is possible to start the big hit game even when the advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery as well as when the big hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery Therefore, by setting the probability of obtaining the advantageous small hit in the second special symbol lottery, to increase the winning probability of winning the big hit game to the first special symbol lottery to a high probability of more than 10 times Will be able to

  Moreover, although this will be described later, basically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. , A game ball which is already waiting for winning on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) may enter into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 The role opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state only for a short time (a short time in which the game ball not in the prize waiting state is rejected). Note that such time (time to operate the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state) is at least shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. It is required to make it difficult for a new gaming ball to be supplied while being in the open state.

  As a result, since it becomes difficult to cause variation in the winning timing of the gaming ball when opening the winning feature winning opening 1155, a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in which a constant sorting operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears. Thus, the game ball can be made to enter the inner area while it is determined in advance which of the V winning hole 1156 and the lost hole 1230c is to be guided.

  As will be described later, the probability of getting a big hit in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment is an extremely low probability (1/400), and the probability of getting a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is also The same low probability (7/1200) is considered. However, in the second special symbol lottery, about the big hit, although it is considered as the very low winning probability (both 1/400) similar to the first special symbol lottery, about the small hit (advantage small hit), the big hit It is obtained with a high probability (for example, 1/6) more than 10 times the probability of winning the game. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery have a reserve, the second special symbol lottery is first taken regardless of the reserve order.

  According to such a configuration, in the time-saving game state, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, a game centered on the second special symbol lottery that is considered to have a very high probability of winning Furthermore, only the game of the second special symbol lottery side will be advanced, and as a result of such progress, an advantageous small hit will usually be obtained immediately as a result of the second special symbol lottery. Then, the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is the upper limit by the game ball being promoted to the second starting opening 1153 until the opening period of the winning combination 1155 in accordance with the advantageous small hit ends. By opening the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 at the timing when the game ball which has already been fired and is waiting for winning while being secured to the value is guided to the V winning opening 1156 (small hit By playing a game), it becomes possible to generate a big hit game according to this.

  It should be noted that when an advantageous small hit is obtained, a small hit game in which the game item winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when the gaming ball that has already been fired and is waiting for a prize is guided to the V winning opening 1156. Since it is possible to generate a big hit game according to this, it is possible to generate such a big hit game and such a big hit game according to this, a bonus game that can obtain a large amount of awards May be provided to the player.

  However, each time a small hit (favorable small hit) is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, simply achieving a high V winning probability that the game ball can be accepted in the V prize opening 1156, “a prize winning prize A machine drawing when a V prize opening 1156 is provided, such as “providing game characteristics based on machine drawing whether or not the game ball is accepted in the V prize opening 1156 with a predetermined machine drawing probability in the internal area of the mouth 1155” The basic gameplay that it takes may be overwhelmed. Usually, it is desirable to set such a machine lottery probability as low as about 1/10 or less.

  Therefore, in view of such actual circumstances, when opening the prize winning opening 1155 in accordance with the small hitting (advantage small hitting) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 It is conceivable to allow more than ten gaming balls to enter and allow only one of the gaming balls to be accepted by the V winning opening 1156. However, the small hit (advantage small hit) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery is different from the big hit aiming to achieve a large number of awards, and can be set as an open time during a small hit game. The upper limit value of the time is 1.8 seconds, and the upper limit value of the number that can be set as the detection number of gaming balls by the above-mentioned prize winning opening sensor 1224 during the small hit game is regulated as 10 It has become.

  Here, in view of the fact that the firing interval at which the game ball can be continuously fired when the player operates the handle device 500 is 0.6 seconds, it is possible to win a prize during the small hit game. It can be seen that the number is usually only 3 by the formula of “1.8 seconds / 0.6 seconds”. In addition, even if it is possible to win many game balls temporarily during a small hit game, when the number of detected game balls by the prize product winning opening sensor 1224 reaches 10, the prize winning opening 1155 is closed. Since it is considered that during the small hit game, it is possible to stably enter into the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 more than 10 gaming balls, and hence it is always required to the V prize opening 1156. It can be said that it is difficult to set the machine lottery probability to a probability value of approximately 1/10 or less despite guiding.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first,
(A) The length in the left-right direction (length of the game ball in the specific rolling area in the rolling direction) on the top surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is L (for example, 6 cm), When it is assumed that the time of the firing interval when the game ball T is continuously hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and launching device 650 in response to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds), the prize winning opening is opened. A structure such as a structure associated with the game ball rolling in the passage such that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game balls T on the upper surface of the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than "L / 2T" By having (B), at least two or more (two or three) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state, as long as the player continues the right strike. Make the game ball exist So that it is possible.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(Ii) All the game balls that are in the waiting state for the prize winning opening 1155 when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is opened from the closed state are the prize winning opening 1155 A configuration such as an internal passage in which the time taken for the game ball entering the internal area to reach the position detected by the prize winning opening sensor 1224 is longer than the global entry time required to enter the internal area of By having (b), the game ball which has entered the internal area is provided for the closing judgment (the upper limit judgment to the number of game balls T that can be won) of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) All the game balls which are in the waiting state for winning can be made to enter and finish before reaching the detected portion (the prize winning opening sensor 1224).

  According to such configurations (i) and (ii), it is possible to positively generate overflow winnings for the upper limit value (up to 10 in a small hit game) of gaming balls that can be won. .

Moreover, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(C) A plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) with respect to the traveling direction (left direction) of the gaming balls so that they fall into the prize winning opening 1155 almost simultaneously. A winning feature opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) provided to slide in a direction (backward direction) that is vertical
By having the configuration (3), each time the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the gaming balls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 are the prize regardless of the number thereof Since it is possible to make all the entry into the internal area of the winning opening 1155, it is possible to shorten the time required for winning to the winning combination 1155 to the utmost.

And although mentioned later, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, further,
(D) At least two or more game balls play a role as the predetermined closing interval time in dividing and executing opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 into a plurality of short opening times sandwiching the predetermined closing interval time. The time required to reach the right side of the item winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (a time more than twice the firing interval (for example, 1.2 seconds or more)) is adopted, and the above-mentioned short opening time As, the time required for the game ball in the prize waiting state to spill out to the prize winning opening 1155 by the slide operation of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, By performing control such as adopting 0.12 seconds), although the short opening operation shorter than the firing interval (in calculation, the expected value for winning is less than one), the short Every time a release operation appears, at least two or more gaming balls that are in a waiting state for winning while the predetermined closing interval time elapses can all be collectively entered into the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. It is like that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when in the open state, and such excellent winning performance is the restriction to the above-mentioned small hit game Even in the case where the game ball is always guided to the V winning hole 1156, the machine drawing probability can be set with a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

  For example, when 0.12 seconds is adopted as the short opening time when the total time allowed as the opening time in the small hit game is 1.8 seconds, the bonus prize opening 1155 is divided into 15 times. It is possible to make it short open. And in this case, in view of the fact that the two or three game balls in the wait for winning state all enter the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155 all at once when the short opening appears. Then, when the combination winning opening 1155 is short-opened divided into 15 times, at least 30 game balls will win the combination winning opening 1155.

  However, according to the restriction on the above-mentioned small hit game, the tenth game ball is detected by the above-mentioned prize winning opening sensor 1224 before all such open control is digested, The small hit game is ended based on the detection. In this respect, in the above configuration, in view of the fact that the two or three game balls in the wait-for-winning state are collectively moved into the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 every time the short opening appears. For example, it is difficult to think that only 10 game balls are always won by the time the small hit game is ended, and it is considered that an overflow prize occurs to frequently cause 11, 12 game balls to win. Therefore, during a small hit game in which such control is carried out, on average more than 10 gaming balls enter into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155, whereby the V winning opening 1156 Even in the case where one of the game balls is always guided, the machine lottery probability can be set with a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

[Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 is a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control substrate 4100 and a command from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the effect display device 1115. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first starting opening sensor 1190 for detecting gaming balls received to the first starting opening 1152, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received to the second starting opening 1153. 1191 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 1180 for detecting gaming balls received to the general winning opening 1151 are input through the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 1135, and a special winning opening sensor 1206, respectively. Detection signals from the prize winning sensor 1224 and the specific sensor 1239 are input through the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100 a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100 b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100 g based on these detection signals, thereby having the start port solenoid 1215 via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the accessory driving mechanism 3114, the attacker driving mechanism 2121 having the prize winning solenoid 1225 and the attacker solenoid 1204, the V prize solenoid 1232, the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function indication First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator through substrate 1114 1188, gaming status indicator 1183, round And it outputs a drive signal to 示器 1182.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs a launch control by a payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and a launch solenoid 654 and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111 b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b, or a command for indicating the state of pachinko game 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the entrance of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the rental ball unit substrate 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 It is input to the CR unit 6 via the interface. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the ball unit substrate 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[Release control unit]
The launch control unit 4120, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585, is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches for launch are input as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and the firing A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the handle main body 504 is touched by a palm or finger and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball by the intention of the player. Is input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 first receives the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880 Are input to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d is based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 to drive the driving current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with the launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 when it is input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 includes the capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 126, performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and the effect display device 1115 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal The light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display A control signal (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( The sound command is output to the sound source IC 4140 c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various rendering units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 It controls so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed such that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 or motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 are door frames via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received light on / off signal based on the received door frame side light on / off command. Output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or based on the received game board side light blink command, the lighting signal or blinking signal is It outputs to LED of each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3124, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped. In addition, a panel relay substrate 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is a dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3324, 3304, 4360, 3476, 3508 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped, each solenoid, etc. FIG.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the motor drive board 3045, etc. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through 882 or the rear surface of the back box 3010 Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to the lower bass speaker 821 Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various sound facilities, and equipment requiring power such as LEDs and sensors, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speakers 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker (FIG. 89) and connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 to amplify the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and output it to each speaker An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Also, on the door frame base substrate 194, the wires that connect various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. with the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. It is connected to the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67, FIG. 89). In addition, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered by the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the winning ball unit 700 or into the game area 1100 despite being fired by the ball striking device 650. A far cover unit 540 (a molded article of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding the game balls (fall balls) not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided close to each other (FIG. 23).

  In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, since game balls (metals) pass at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and may reach 10 several kV Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, the charges accumulated in the resin, even if grounded, are only removed from the very periphery, and most of them remain.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge. In this case, an abnormal audio signal continuing for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattle may be generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker may be a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound may be generated), which may make the player uncomfortable. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually absent on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) which blocks an abnormal sound signal so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As for voice output, as described above, peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and receives various commands from main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d is output to the sound source IC 4140 c (FIG. 126).

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided at the lower portion of the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194 etc. Control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 126 and 127).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. FIG. 127 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the door frame base substrate 194 provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected by the wiring 196, and the periphery from the door frame base substrate 194 A +24 V voltage and a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 127, in the main body frame 3, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 128, from the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, a ground signal, a +24 V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821 outputted from the door frame base substrate 194. The signal is relayed and output through the speaker protection harness 883 to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821 and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is done. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, as for the arrangement place of the abnormal sound signal interception board 884 in main part frame 3, it is desirable that it is a place which is hard to receive the influence of static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location distant from the far cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 in a portion that is less susceptible to the influence of electrostatic noise, input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 can be stably suppressed.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal, and is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is blocked so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the abnormal speech signal blocking substrate 884 detects an abnormal speech signal from the abnormal speech signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal from the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 is provided to cut off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when the output abnormality detection signal is received.

  The +24 V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the +24 V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884.

  The woofer + signal which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  Also, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. , And is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge form, a resistor SR1 (47 k.OMEGA.) Disposed in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, An infrared LED mainly composed of a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal out of two is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branched is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to constitute a rectification bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 for supplying the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the rear stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifier bridge to the rear stage. The circuit is connected to a 0V line 891 which supplies 0V whose negative portion has been cut and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectification bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (+ voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of + voltage to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, ripples of the waveform of the positive voltage are removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal, that is, + voltage is applied after rectification. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6 The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the latter stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1. It is done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The base terminal of the relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the 3rd terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL 1 is connected to the ground line 887. Furthermore, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Are connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Furthermore, varistor SZNR1 for induced current bypass by self-induction function is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of relay SRL1, and relay serial number 5 of relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Incidentally, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC 1, no electrical noise enters the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 directly. It is supposed to be.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal voice signal is input] <abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different peak amplitude) is input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct. In FIG. 128, current flows from top to bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in a period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the positive voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the + voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also maintain the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not substantially turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is maintained in the off state, and the transistor STR3 is also maintained in the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in the inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excitation state, and the non-operation B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, and the non-operation between the third terminal and the fourth terminal. A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL 1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal continues for a predetermined period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage] <abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, a rise in voltage of the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in charge accumulated in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is applied. It will approach a constant voltage and reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) The current flows through the resistor SR5, the zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0 V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing to the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside relay SRL1 between the No. terminal and the terminal is energized, and relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the fifth and sixth terminals of relay SRL1 in the operating state (the contact is open), and between the third and fourth terminals in the operating state. A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the disconnection state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted in the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  The third and fourth terminals of relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the third terminal of relay SRL1 is pulled to ground, and the collector terminal of transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of relay SRL1 is grounded. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal and the ground line 887 The current flows to the conductive state, and the conductive state of the coil is maintained. Thus, the woofer + signal remains disconnected from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above embodiment, when abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is maintained by blocking the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority given to preventing damage to the speakers. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a person in charge or the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL 1 is canceled by turning on the game machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage] <abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the proper amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, Diode SD2 and diode SD3 conduct, and charging current flows from the top to the bottom of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 in FIG. Be done.

  Further, for example, in the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely high compared to the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain waveform is the same for the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 The charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the through, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises to reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when an abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, when photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, transistor STR3 is turned on and transistor STR3 is turned on, whereby relay SRL1 is activated and terminals 5 and 6 of relay SRL1 are cut off. In the state, the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted at the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of an abnormal sound due to an abnormal sound signal of an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making unpleasant sounds.

[Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3205 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A screen displayed on the effect display device 1115, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for performing display control of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above The character ROM 4150 d stores various data, and the character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150 c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 and various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on the effect display device 1115 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1115. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the effect display device 1115 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is displayed for the effect display device 1115 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1115 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1115. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit collected on the effect display device 1115. For example, when displaying various persons on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when sprites overlap with each other are set, and the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device It is drawn to 3252.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel, as viewed from the front, sequentially from left to right, and intersect with the one direction It is driven by a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction of When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the effect display device 1115, the main display scans from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. And sequentially output to pixels for one line. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, the main scanning is sequentially output from left to right as pixels in one line as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as the main scanning.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of processing upon power failure. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment).

  FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing a procedure of control processing of a special symbol. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the starting hole winning process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing variation start processing of a special symbol. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process of the special symbol. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during variation of the special symbol. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the small hit game start process of the special symbol. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the small hit game process of the special symbol. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit game start processing of the special symbol. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol big hit game processing.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 129, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. If there is, the process (return process at power failure) is executed according to the backup data stored in the RAM. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and device settings around the CPU (normal initial state Setting, setting of interrupt timing, etc.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the gaming state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  In the power-off process, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in a state before power failure. In order to start from the above, the state at the time of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About power off process]
Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the power-off occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure notification signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, it may not be possible to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 while the main process is being executed, as shown in FIG. After executing the register save process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In addition, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display 1185 or 1186 based on the progressing state of the game, or the special electric character (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). Control the winning combination opening and closing member 1221 and the big winning opening opening and closing member 1203) to open and close the winning combination opening 1155 and the big winning opening 1154 by changing the opening and closing state of the winning combination opening 1155 and the big winning opening 1154 Execute the process to

  In step S15, a normal control process is executed including a lottery process for a drop on the normal hit which is an operation trigger of the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after the end of the big hit gaming state, if a specific condition (time short flag ON) is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state The time required for the control is shortened, the drive mode of the starting opening door member 1214 is changed, and the lottery processing is executed so that winning of the second starting opening 1153 is permitted (so-called short time game State). In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is in the short game state, the normal hit is always won when the normal lottery is performed, but when it is not in the short game state (the game is in the normal game state) At the same time, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, a bridge shorter than the above-mentioned winning possible threshold time required for the game ball T to roll on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 and be received by the second starting opening 1153. While only the time is selected, when in the time saving game state, a bridge time longer than the above-mentioned prize acceptable threshold time is always selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, each time the starting opening door member 1214 is operated, the player strikes the game ball in the right area of the center role 1130 in the game area 1100 only when the player is in the time-saving game state. Second, it is possible to make the lottery for the hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game with a high probability of entering the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 (second special (second special) Design lottery).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the surrounding control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission processing, processing of transmitting the power on command set in the power on processing (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  However, although this will be described later, in this embodiment, whether or not the game ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156 in the small hit game is determined by the type of the symbol at the time of the small hit, It is considered possible to determine whether or not an illegal act has been made according to the type of this symbol. As a result, when it is determined that an illegal act has been made, a signal indicating that is output to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) in the output data setting process of step S16, and based on such a symbol As long as control is in progress, fraud management can be performed.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for hit determination used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (also called a big hit determination, a big hit lottery), and a stop symbol of a special symbol are determined. Symbol random numbers used to make, reach random numbers used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high expectation effects such as reach effects when it is determined that a big hit lottery is not a hit, special symbol indicator 1185 , Determine the variation random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed in 1186, the opening mode (round number etc.) of the big winning opening 1154 in the big hit game The random number for determining the round used to make the starting position opening door member (movable piece) 1214 which can accept the winning of the second starting opening 1153 Determining whether or not (usually lottery per determination) Average per determining random number used in the is positioned state) located on the front side position, and the like.

  In addition, the symbol random number, when it is determined that it was elected to hit (small hit, big hit), it is judged on the status type (small hit, big hit, etc.) whether it is activated Also served. However, as will be described later, when a small hit is won, a big hit does not occur if the game ball T does not receive the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game according to the small hit (condition device operates) do not do). That is, in this case, the next symbol variation is performed without activating the time saving function.

  Of these random numbers, in random number update processing 1, the random number for winning determination related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the symbol random number, the random number for round determination, and the normal regarding whether or not the starting opening door member 1214 is positioned at the appearance position Update the random number for judgment per pattern. That is, the random number used in the determination regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is to be generated, and probability of determining that a starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at an appearance position) is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the reach random number, the variable random number and the like not related to the normal lottery are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In the special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153. Then, after the first and second starting-opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the processing flag is selectively selected among the plurality of processes (step S120 to step S240) shown in the figure. Will do.

  More specifically, when the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ((0) YES in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), it is determined which of the first special symbol-side game and the second special symbol-side game is to be processed, and the jackpot of the determined side After the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, the processing flag is updated to “1”. In addition, the processing concerning the game (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) of the side determined in this way is timer interruption processing every 4 ms until the updated processing flag is returned to "0". It will be carried out continuously each time.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the process flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the special symbol (identification displayed on the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) The variation pattern of the symbol) (such as the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) is determined After being processed, the processing flag is updated to "2".

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the process flag is 2 (step S160). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160), the processing during variation (step S170) is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time set in fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and a special symbol display (the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on time-out) The variation display of the special symbol on the display 1186) is stopped. After that, when it is determined that the big hit is won in the change start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "5". On the other hand, the processing selection flag is updated to "3" when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (the small hit is won) although the big hit is lost. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the jackpot is missed and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S180). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180), small hit game start processing (step S190) is executed to create an interval period before starting the small hit game. In addition, when the interval period before starting a small hit game passes, the processing flag is updated to "4" in the said small hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S180 (NO in step S180), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S200). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200), the small hitting game processing (step S210) is executed. In this small hit game processing, while performing the small hit game which makes the opening and closing operation (sliding operation) of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in a control mode according to the type of small hitting It is determined whether the gaming ball having entered the internal area is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 or not. As a result, when it is determined in the first small hit game processing that game balls have been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first processing flag is set to "5" to start the big hit game. It will be updated. However, when it is not determined that the gaming balls have been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 within a predetermined time, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S220). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220), the jackpot game start processing (step S230) is executed. In this big hit game start processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the jackpot game is completed in this way, the processing flag is updated to "6".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 in step S220 (NO in step S220), it is determined that the processing flag is 6, and the big hit game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game processing, the mode (number of rounds, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) of the big hit game to open and close the big winning opening 1154 is set, and the big winning opening opening and closing member 1203 based on the set big hit game mode. Opening and closing operation is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  Thus, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S170, step S190, step S210, step S230, and step S240 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

[About the first and second starting opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting-opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning process.

  In the first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), the process mainly relates to the determination as to whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 1152 and the second starting port 1153; The processing concerning the update of the pending status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the various random numbers acquired will be described on the condition that it is determined that the ball has been entered And processing to be provided for advance effects such as forward effects, etc.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 1191. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 1191, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 1153 (YES in step S201), and the next The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol (second random number for random judgment, second symbol random number, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) (2) A determination is made as to whether or not the value of the pending number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203), the hold history update process (step S204), and the second advance determination process (step S209a) are sequentially performed. .

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first obtains various data (second random number for judgment of falling), obtained by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1153 as the second start suspension storing process (step S203). Two symbol random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100 e) while being associated with special symbol types and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100 e as a hold history update process (step S 204). Then, next, as the second advance determination process (step S209a), before the execution condition of the big hit lottery put in the hold state is satisfied, based on various random numbers provided for the big hit lottery The results will be determined in advance.

  In the process of step S203, a winning notice command is set indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 1153 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), The prize notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the effect display device 1115 or the like performs a hold display on the second start port 1153 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 1191 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value is 4 then, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190, it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting opening 1152 (YES in step S205), and the next The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first special symbol (first random number for determination of the first drop, first symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a A determination is made as to whether or not the upper limit value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207), the hold history update process (step S208), and the first advance determination process (step S209b) are sequentially performed. .

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (a first hit determination random number, a first hit determination random number, a first hit determination random number, One symbol random number etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100 e) while being associated with the type of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100 e as a hold history update process (step S208). Then, next, as the first advance determination process (step S209b), before the execution condition of the big hit lottery put in the above-mentioned suspended state is satisfied, based on various random numbers provided for the big hit lottery, The results will be determined in advance.

  Also in the process of step S207, a winning notice command is set that indicates that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 1152 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), The prize notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, it is possible to quickly update the effect display device 1115 or the like on the first start port 1152 side through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 1152, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, the first and second starting opening winning processes are ended at this time.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) to the second starting opening 1153 is performed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting opening 1152 is executed. There is. However, instead of this, it may be possible to execute a winning process for the second starting port 1153 after performing the winning process for the first starting port 1152.

  Here, the second advance determination process (step S209a) and the first advance determination process (S209b) will be described in detail. Hereinafter, the term "preceding determination process" means the second preceding determination process (step S209a) and the first preceding determination process (S209b).

  In the advance determination process, as described above, the result of the lottery is determined based on various random numbers provided for the big hit lottery before the execution condition of the big hit lottery put in the hold state is established. The thing is done.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the random number for collision judgment (the first collision judgment random number, the second collision judgment random number) to determine the value of the jackpot lottery (first It is determined whether or not it is the same value as the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery). And as a result, when it is the same value as the big hit decision value, when it is shown that it was elected to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit is selected as the next processing, this selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number By comparing with the first variation random number and the second variation random number, it is determined with respect to the peripheral control board 4010 which variation pattern is to be determined in determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit described later. Set a variation pattern precedent determination command to be notified in advance. Then, next, using the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), the peripheral control board 4010 will be determined which type is to be determined when determining the type of the big hit which will be described later. For this, a type advance determination time command to be notified in advance is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the win determination random number (the first win determination random number, the second win determination random number) is a value different from the above-described big hit determination value, small hits may be performed as the next process. It is determined whether it is the same value as the small hit determination value indicating that the player has won. And as a result, when it is the same value as the small hitting decision value and it is shown that it was elected in the small hitting, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hitting is selected as the next processing, this fluctuation pattern table which is selected The peripheral control board determines which fluctuation pattern is to be determined when determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, which will be described later, by comparing the variable random number (the first variable random number, the second variable random number) A fluctuation pattern precedent determination command to be notified in advance to 4010 is set. Then, next, using the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), the peripheral control board will be determined which type is to be determined when the type of the small hit described later is determined. A type advance determination time command to notify in advance to 4010 will be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the win determination random number (the first win determination random number, the second hit determination random number) is different from any of the above-mentioned big hit determination value and the above small hit determination value, the following As a process, select a variation pattern table at the time of the below-mentioned loss (including a loss for which reach effect is not performed), and compare the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number (first variation random number, second variation random number) Change pattern to notify in advance to the peripheral control board 4010 which change pattern is to be determined at the time of determination of the change pattern at the time of the below-mentioned loss (including a loss not performing reach production). Set the command for advance judgment. In this case, the main control MPU 4100a uses reach random numbers (first reach random numbers, second reach random numbers) to determine whether it is a reach loss described later or a loss without a reach, and Based on the result, any fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss or reach loss is selected, and by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table with the fluctuation random number (first fluctuation random number, second fluctuation random number), the below-mentioned loss time Alternatively, it may be determined which fluctuation pattern is to be determined in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of reach loss.

  And after this, the main control MPU 4100a holds the updated number of holdings of the big hit lottery (the value of the number of holding counters) together with the type of the special symbol by various random numbers provided for the preceding determination processing. Performs processing in which a command is set at advance determination time. Note that the variation pattern lead determination command, the type lead determination check command, and the hold lead determination check command thus set are each transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. The Rukoto.

  That is, as described above, the control of the peripheral control unit 4140 side is performed by transmitting these commands (the change pattern leading determination determination command, the type advance determination determination determination command, and the hold advance determination determination command) to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, it becomes possible to cause a preread effect or an advance effect to be described later to appear. However, although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when there is a case where the type is definitely indicated in advance when a small hit is obtained, a problem in game design may occur. Therefore, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, even if the small hit type is determined in advance, the same value is determined as the above-mentioned type precedent determination regardless of the type for the determined small hit type. By setting the time command, it is difficult for the peripheral control unit 4140 to grasp this.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control unit 4140 is made capable of grasping the information obtained as the result of either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery based on the hold advance determination time command. And whether it is a small hit based on the first special symbol lottery (any one of the first disadvantage small hit, the second disadvantage small hit, and the first advantageous small hit), or the second special symbol lottery The degree of rough type is determined beforehand, such as whether it is a small hit (second advantageous small hit) (see FIG. 141). As described above, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to the present embodiment operates on various processing programs that can be grasped to a certain degree of small hit, but are hard to be determined definitively. It has become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit in the first special symbol lottery is indicated in advance, it will be the first big hit without using the information (command at the time of type precedent determination) concerning the symbol random number. Is made comprehensible in advance (see Figure 141), and if the big hit in the second special symbol lottery is indicated in advance, it will be the second big hit without using the information related to the symbol random number (command at type precedent determination) Can be grasped in advance (see FIG. 141).

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the preceding determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[About change start process]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first determines the values of the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol storage indicators 1184 and 1187 (first start It is determined whether or not the number of memories and the second number of starting memories) are both "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two suspension number counters corresponding to the special symbol storage indicators 1184 and 1187 are the suspension number of the first special symbol side game (lottery) and the suspension of the second special symbol side game (lottery) The numbers are shown respectively. Therefore, if the value of the number-of-holds counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the interrupt The fluctuation start process in the process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interruption processing is performed, whether there is a game (lottery) on the first special symbol side or a game (lottery) on the second special symbol side in the pending state in the processing of step S301. The progress of the game of the special symbol is substantially put in a standby state until it is judged whether or not it is determined that the lottery process of any of the special symbols is in the hold state. It will be.

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), the order concerning execution of the big hit lottery on the special symbol side to be processed is updated, The shift processing in the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a is performed (steps S302 to S310).

  In the first special symbol suspension storage area, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol (for example, a random number for the first winning judgment, a first symbol random number, a first reach random number, a first variation random number) Is stored based on the order of holding, and the second special symbol hold storage area includes a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol (for example, a random number for the second winning judgment, a second symbol random number, a second reach random number , Second variable random numbers) are stored based on their pending order.

  The main control MPU 4100a is stored as a shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol storage area) when the special symbol changes, in the special symbol storage area on the side to be processed You will have to manipulate the That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is the process of setting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the process of setting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening and closing member 1221 and the special winning opening and closing member 1203 By providing the processing concerning the setting of the aspect, the processing concerning the setting of the gaming state, etc., the starting game triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153 can be advanced become.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol side lottery processing is performed, the big hit game starts more than when the first special symbol side lottery processing is performed. The lottery for winning (big hit, advantageous small hit) is to be performed with a high probability of 10 times or more.

  In this point, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area), the execution of the drawing of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the player is considered to be a highly accurate side Operate the random numbers stored in the random number storage area (special symbol hold storage area) so that all the lottery based on the winning on the second starting opening 1153 (lottery of the second special symbol) will be settled first I am trying to do it. Thus, until the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery is interrupted and becomes “0”, the lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 1153 which is considered to be highly accurate for the player (second special It will be possible to perform only the lottery of symbols) one after another. In addition, although this will be described later, in the gaming state where the so-called time saving function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol which is to be digested first is not interrupted. Since control is performed such that the time for changing the game ball to the above-mentioned second starting opening 1153 to an easy execution state, which becomes an execution trigger, is lengthened, only the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is continuous It is possible to improve the game interest by executing the game.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134, at the time of the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, it corresponds to the second special symbol that is preferentially digested It is determined whether the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) is "0". And as a result of this, when it is judged that the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the 2nd special symbol which is a side to be digested preferentially is not "0" (NO in step S302), as the process of step S303, Of each storage area of the second special symbol storage area of RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, a random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, a random number for the second hit determination, a second symbol random number, a second reach random number , And the second variation random number) is read from the same RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S304, the first-in first-out random number group involved in the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Shift operation is performed in the mode of Out).

  More specifically, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side is in a progressing state (step S305). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by “1” in order to update the pending number for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S306). In addition, about the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by checking every time interrupt processing is performed after the variation start processing is finished. (Here, the second special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset when, for example, the processing flag is updated to "0".

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially digested is "0". In the case (YES in step S302), as the process of step S307, a random number group stored in the first storage area among the storage areas of the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, The first random number for determination of first drop, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first variation random number) are read out from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S308, the first-in first-out random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Shift operation is performed in the mode of Out).

  More specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side is progressed (step S308). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by “1” to update the pending number for the first special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S310). In addition, about the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by checking every time interrupt processing is performed after the variation start processing is finished. (Here, the first special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

  Thus, when the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol storage area) is finished, the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag is acquired next as the processing of step S311. The lottery process for the hit performed on the basis of the win determination random number etc. is performed. Note that various types of information determined in the process of step S311 are stored in the RAM 4100e or the like of the main control board 4100 so as to be used for determination of subsequent games.

  Here, in the special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), it is a big hit based on the hit determination table regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state) A determination process is performed as to whether it is a small hit, a reach loss, or a loss without a reach.

  More specifically, in the table on the first special symbol side of the hit determination table to be referred to for comparison with the win determination random number, among the 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the first hit determination random number The three values match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, the seven values match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won, and the 1,190 values are the above-mentioned loss The 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the first random number for the drop determination are associated with one another so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the probability that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol will be set as 1/400, the first The probability that a small hit is obtained as a result of the drawing of the special symbol will be set as about 1/171.

  In addition, when the value acquired as a random number for first hit determination is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the value of the acquired first reach random number. .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the type of the big hit,
・ Among the 15 round games repeated, the jackpot game is under special opening control (big winning opening 1154) that a large number of prizes can be obtained only by 4 round games. Although it is advanced, after the big hit game is executed, it is possible to obtain a large amount of prizes in the first big hit which is a type that always generates a short game state, and · all 15 round games repeated. Although the big hit game is advanced under the open control (large winning a prize opening 1154) which is done, only when it is elected when it is in the normal game state (the game state where the time saving function is not activated), the big hit game It is decided to prepare a second big hit, which is a type that generates a short game state after being executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a type of small hit,
-Among the disadvantaged small hits, which is a type for opening the prize winning opening 1155 in a mode that can not be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, a relatively short time is required as the time required to execute the small hitting game. The first disadvantage small hit, which is the type adopted
-Among the disadvantage small hits which is a type to open the prize winning opening 1155 in a mode that can not be distributed to the V prize mouth (specific area) 1156, at the winning timing of the gaming ball when opening the prize winning opening 1155 The second disadvantage small hit, which is a type in which the prize product winning opening 1155 is opened a plurality of times while it is determined in advance that guiding the lost hole 1230c is induced using the above-mentioned configuration in which variations hardly occur.
-Among the advantageous small hits which is a type in which the above-mentioned prize winning prize opening 1155 is made open at the timing when the game ball which has already been fired and is waiting for winning is guided to the V prize opening 1156, During the period until the predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol stop, as in the case of the above-mentioned second disadvantage small hit (or similar), variation occurs in the winning timing of the gaming ball when opening the winning feature winning opening 1155 It is a type that opens the prize winning opening 1155 multiple times in a predetermined number of times in which it is determined in advance that guidance to the lost hole 1230c is made using the above-described configuration that becomes difficult, and after a predetermined time has passed since symbol stop. The first advantageous small hit, which is the type that gives the same bonus as the winning of the first jackpot when it is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, and · · · · · · Among the advantageous small hits, which is a type in which the above-mentioned game product winning opening 1155 can be opened at the timing when the gaming ball which is considered to be waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156, In the operation state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the short opening operation by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times, and such a short opening operation is performed. Among them, a second advantageous small hit, which is a type for giving the same benefits as the winning of the second big hit when distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, is prepared.

  And, in the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the above-obtained symbol random number, the first big hit (earning in big hit game Although there are relatively few prizes to be made possible, only the 15R (time stamp) that is controlled to the short time game state is determined as the type only after the big hit game is played. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control is performed such that the game ball is hard to enter the big winning opening 1154 in the first 11 round games of the round games repeated 15 times. The game ball is controlled to be released in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the big winning opening 1154 in the remaining four round games.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the first disadvantageous small hit, based on the value of the acquired symbol random number, Either the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is determined.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the probability ((7/1200) × ((7 Although it is 20/1000)), it is possible to have the possibility that an advantageous small hit may be determined as its type. For this reason, even when the small hit game of the first special symbol side is performed, since the possibility that the big hit game may occur is left, the bonus special character side of the small hit game of the first special symbol side Every time the winning opening 1155 is opened, it is possible to urge the player to win a prize in the winning combination 1155, and to expect to be controlled to shift to the short game state after the big hit game is played. Will be able to

  In particular, in the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, so that the execution process of the small hit game itself can be functioned as an expected effect become.

  Further, in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, only the first advantageous small hit can be determined as the advantageous small hit. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery and an advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained. Regardless of when the big hit game is executed on the basis, after the big hit game is executed, a short time gaming state is always generated only for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the lottery of special symbols is digested 100 times) Will be able to

  On the other hand, in the table on the second special symbol side, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), among the 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the second crash judgment random number, 3 types of values are won by the big hit Match with the big hit determination value indicating 200, match with the small hit determination value indicating that the 200 types of values were won in the small hit, and match the loss determination value indicating the 997 types of the above loss. The 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the second hit determination random number are associated with one another. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the probability that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol will be set as 1/400, the second The probability that a small hit is obtained as a result of the drawing of the special symbol will be set as 1/6.

  In addition, when the value acquired as the random number for the second hit determination is loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the value of the acquired second reach random number. .

  Also, in the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the above-obtained symbol random number, the second big hit (obtained in big hit game There are relatively many prizes that are made possible, but only if they are won when the player is in the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the time saving function is not activated), they are controlled to the short time gaming state after the big hit game is played. (15 R) (time, junior high, and large hit) is determined as the type.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, only the second advantageous small hit is obtained based on the value of the acquired symbol random number. Is to be determined as the type. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit (second big hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery and an advantageous small hit (second advantageous small hit) is obtained. Even if the big hit game is executed based on the big hit game that can be obtained relatively many prizes is executed, but the normal gaming state (a game state in which the time saving function is not activated) Only when it is won when it is in, it is possible to generate a short game state only for a predetermined period (for example, a period until a lottery of special symbols is digested 100 times) after a big hit game is played. ing.

  As described above, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, even if the game ball is won in the prize winning opening 1155, all of those gaming balls are in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. A disadvantageous small hit game in which the above-mentioned prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is operated to open and close so as not to be distributed is performed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of the small hit, the above-mentioned bonus is at the timing when the gaming ball which has already been fired and is waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156. An advantageous small hit game in which the winning opening 1155 is made open is performed.

  Therefore, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of the small hit, although the small hit game in which an opportunity for winning a prize is given is performed by opening the prize winning opening 1155, the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 Since the game ball is accepted and does not cause a big hit game, it can be said that in a broad sense, it can be classified as one type of loss. Therefore, including such a disadvantage small hit, the lottery result not having the possibility of generating a big hit game (or the big hit game only with a probability lower than the big hit winning probability set to an extremely low probability) The generic name of the lottery results that can not be generated may be called "dropout".

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the machine drawing for sorting the gaming balls between the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 and the general area (missing area) is performed. Although a small hit game is performed, the game ball is substantially distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 to be executed as a game that is determined to cause a big hit game, so in a broad sense In terms of meaning, it can be said that there is something that can be classified as a big hit. Therefore, including such an advantageous small hit, it is a lottery result which will generate a big hit game if the game (for example, 100 game balls are sequentially hit to the right in one minute, etc.) is properly advanced. (Or, if the game is properly progressed, the probability of exceeding 1⁄2 (the probability of generating a big hit game is higher is higher)) The generic name of the lottery result that will generate a big hit game is called "winning" You may do so.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (step S311) is performed in this way, a flag indicating the result of the special symbol lottery as the process of step S312, and the special symbol lottery A symbol information command indicating the result (including the type when a big hit or a small hit is obtained) is set, respectively. After that, when the process flag is updated to “1” so that the process is shifted to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) as the process of step S313, this process is ended.

  In addition, the result (including the type of special symbol to be processed) of the special symbol lottery obtained in the variation start process is shown in FIG. 131 as the symbol information command set in the process of step S312. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17).

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, a variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (step S311) or the like will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a flag indicating that a big hit has been won. If is set (YES in step S401), the variation pattern table for big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402), and if the flag indicating that the small hit is won is set (step S403) In step S404, select the fluctuation pattern table for small hits according to the game state (step S404), and if the reach flag is set (YES in step S405), select the fluctuation pattern table for reach (step S405) S406), neither a big hit nor a small hit or reach loser If a flag state indicating that it is, that is, if the normal loss (loss is not executed reach demonstration) (NO in step S405), and selects the variation pattern table during loss (step S407).

  Then, the variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number (first variation random number or second variation random number) acquired in the variation start process (step S130) (step S408). A special symbol indicator on the side to be processed by setting a variation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 4010 to start the determined variation pattern (first special symbol indicator 1185 or second special symbol indicator The variable display of the special symbol displayed on 1186) is started (step S409). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S410). As a result, the variation control is performed by the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) and the effect display device 1115 only for the variation time thus determined. After that, when the process flag is updated to “2” so that the process proceeds to the during-variation process (step S170a) as the process of step S411, the process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S409. . Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the symbol information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

  By the way, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, it is the first special symbol side table among the big hit variation pattern tables used in the process of step S402, and is in the normal gaming state In the normal-use big hit fluctuation pattern table used, a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) for enhancing the display effect in the effect display device 1115 are stored in cooperation with the reach loss fluctuation pattern table. That is, in cooperation with the reach loss fluctuation pattern table, the expectation degrees for the above-mentioned "winning" are made different from one another among those fluctuation patterns, and in the process of step S408a, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected. Will be determined by

  Also, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, among the small hitting variation pattern tables used in the process of step S404, when it is the table on the first special symbol side and is in the normal gaming state In the normal small hit variation pattern table used for the first, the first advantageous small hit is obtained regardless of the type of the small hit (the first small penalty, the second small penalty, the first small penalty). It is made to appear a specific effect pattern that makes you expect.

  According to such a configuration, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the drawing of the first special symbol when in the normal gaming state, regardless of the type, the display effect having the specific effect pattern ends After the game, it is possible to urge the winning combination 1155 to hit the game ball right. However, when a small hit game corresponding to the winning of the first disadvantaged small hit is played, it will be recognized immediately from the opening mode that it is a "dropout". On the other hand, when a small hit game corresponding to the second disadvantage small hit is played, the execution process of the small hit game itself functions as an expected effect from the symbol stop until the middle stage when a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of "winning" for a long time.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a condition (here, a condition that is more advantageous than a normal condition (here, a condition related to a big hit lottery on the first special symbol side) after the occurrence of a big hit game. When it is in the situation where the big hit lottery which is on hold condition is digested under the condition which requires the big hit lottery side of the 2nd special symbol side, between the fluctuation time of the symbol according to the result of the big hit lottery (the fluctuation pattern) The effect pattern is determined so that it is possible to grasp the drop without giving a relation to it, and the control to make the determined effect pattern appear in the execution period of the big hit game (control according to the advance effect) is performed. .

  More specifically, for a big hit lottery that has already been put on hold when a big hit game is executed, the winning pattern is already indicated within the playing period of the big hit game by the above determined effect pattern The symbol variation is started according to the result of the jackpot lottery.

  According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to start the effect for the above-mentioned drop again while the symbol variation is performed, the bold setting of the symbol variation itself is performed without sacrificing the effect. It will be possible.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the steps S402, S404, S406, and S407 in the variation pattern setting process, a special symbol (the first symbol after the big hit game is over) The variation pattern table to be selected can be made different based on the number of variations of the special symbol and the second special symbol). More specifically, in determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol that has been digested since the end of the big hit game is 0 to 3 times, and 0 to 3 times If it is, it is determined that the variation pattern table in the special selection state is selected as being in the special selection state (state without the need to start the presentation anew) after the advance effect described below is performed. ing. In addition, as a variation pattern table in the special selection state, tables selected at the big hit, the small hit, the reach time, and the lost time are prepared.

  And among the variation pattern tables in the special selection state, it is a table on the second special symbol side, and in the variation pattern table at the time of small hit, at the reach, and at the end of the lost pattern In the form of (a), a bold setting (the fluctuation time of the pattern) is made such that only the fluctuation pattern of ultrashortened fluctuation which is defined as 0.099 seconds shorter than any other fluctuation time can be selected. Distribution) is made.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time from the symbol variation being stopped to the next symbol variation being newly started (the symbol stopping time maintained in the stopped condition) is The time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern (time) of the extremely shortened fluctuation.

  According to such a configuration, while symbol variation of four times after the big hit game is over (the upper limit number of holdings which can put the big hit lottery on the second special symbol side on hold status) is digested, Basically, since the symbol is maintained in the stopped state, it is possible to make it difficult to make the variation of the symbol take place.

  That is, in this case, by causing the advance effect to be described later to appear within the execution period of the big hit game, speedy game progress can be realized without sacrificing the effect, as well as the second special symbol side. If a hit (in this case, a big hit or a small hit) is obtained in any of the held big hit lottery (up to 4 big hit lottery), 2 big hit games are continuous without changing the symbol It will be possible to provide gameplay as if it were performed.

  However, if such a variation pattern (time) of super-shortening variation is used even in the symbol variation when the big hit is obtained, the game ball enters the second starting opening 1153 despite being in the short game state The next big hit game may occur without being able to do the ball (the hold of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol side).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the big hit lottery (second special symbol for the number of holding upper limit number that can put the big hit lottery on the second special symbol side on hold) at the end of the big hit game. In the case where the transition control to the short game state is performed while the lottery is put on hold, and the hit is obtained by any of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) being put on hold The required value of the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is controlled to be "1" or more within the time required for the digestion of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) for the upper limit number of holdings. It is made easy to give an operation opportunity of the starting opening door member 1214 by the opening extension function (function to always select the bridge time longer than the winning possible threshold time as the operating time of the starting opening door member 1214) in time. , It is assumed that this will be described later.

  In addition, although this will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, holding of four times (the upper limit number of holdings which can put the big hit lottery on the second special symbol side on hold) at the end of the big hit game If a big hit can not be obtained in all of the big hit lottery that is in the state, combined with the configuration according to the fluctuation pattern of the above-mentioned ultra-shortened fluctuation, it takes for the digestion of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) A means is provided which can execute control such that the expected value of the number of times the starting opening door member 1214 operates within time is less than "1".

  According to such a configuration, a big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) for 4 times (for the upper limit number of holding upper limit which can put the big hit lottery on the second special symbol side on hold) at the end of the big hit game is on hold status If the transition control to the time-saving game state is performed and the big hit is not obtained in all of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is put on hold among them, those lottery It is difficult to make the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 by the open extension function (the function of selecting the bridge time longer than the winning possible threshold time as the operating time of the starting opening door member 1214) difficult to appear within the time required for digestion. become able to.

  In this way, it is within the time until the big hit lottery of 4 batches (the upper limit number of holdings which can put the big hit lottery of the second special symbol side on hold status) which is on hold at the end of the big hit game is digested Sometimes, by making it difficult to make the movement (the operation of the start opening door member 1214 by the open extension function) difficult to appear within the period when the big hit game is played, the big hit game which is advantageous for the player is continuous Will be able to give a stronger impression as if it were being done.

  However, when transition control from a period when a big hit game is played to a short time game state is performed, the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 within the time required for the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) for the upper limit number of holdings Even if control is performed so that the expected value of V becomes less than "1", a situation may occur in which the start-up opening door member 1214 operates within the time required for such digestion.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, in addition to the period controlled from the period when the big hit game is played to the time saving game state, the period controlled from the period when the big hit game is played to the normal game state Even in the case where the big hit lottery is performed under advantageous conditions, the game characteristic as to whether or not the big hit game can be generated again is provided.

  That is, in this case, the control mode concerning at least the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 does not change from the period in which the big hit game is played even after being controlled to the normal game state from the period when the big hit game is played Even if the start-up opening door member 1214 operates when the jackpot game is continuously generated, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the jackpot game is interrupted due to the symbol variation.

[About processing during fluctuation]
Next, the during-variation process (step S170) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of an example of the process during variation.

  When the process flag indicates that the process during variation (step S170) should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, first, as the process of step S501, the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is performed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation timer set in the process of step S410 has become 0, that is, whether or not the set fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501), each time the fluctuation processing (step S170) is performed, In the process of S531, the fluctuation timer is decremented by one.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the processing of steps S502 and S503. The special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator) on the side to be processed is the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) that has already been decided While performing display control for ending the variable display by displaying on 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186), the decoration according to the stop symbol of the special symbol on the side to be processed by the effect display device 1115 A confirmation stop command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The determination stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the effect result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the periphery control unit 4140 side.

  In this way, after performing processing concerning symbol stop, this processing will be ended when various processing according to the result of the special symbol lottery is executed.

  For example, first, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504), when the processing flag is updated to "5" to start a big hit game (step S506), this processing is ended. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, when the processing flag is updated to "3" to start a small hit game (step S513), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504 and NO in step S511), first, it is determined whether the time saving function is activated (step S521). Then, when the time saving function is in operation, it is determined whether the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested while the time reducing function is in operation has reached a predetermined upper limit value (step S522). That is, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the time saving function is assumed as the condition for ending the time saving game state is established. Are stopped (step S523). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the processing flag is updated to “0”, assuming that it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped as shown as a loss (step S524 ), End this process. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the process of step S301 is suspended.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol side, and in the lottery, it is 1/6 With such a high probability, “winning (second advantageous small hit)” can be obtained. Therefore, normally, "winning (second advantageous small hit)" will be obtained immediately and the second special symbol side will generate a big hit game and the short game state will be ended at that time, and the special symbol It can be said that the fact that the short game state is ended when the number of times of change reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times) is almost impossible.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S190) executed when the process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in the small hit game start process (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a first measures a small hit game start interval interval (small hit start interval timer) as the process of step S601. It is determined whether or not the) is already set. As a result, when the small hit start interval timer is not yet set, the small hit start interval timer is set as the process of steps S602 and S603 to start the small hit game before start interval. Sets the hit interval start command.

  Then, next, at the time of controlling the rotation of the rotating body 1236 provided in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 as the process of step S604, this process is once ended. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the drawing of the special symbol, the variation of the special symbol is finished (stop symbol appears) and always constant. It is assumed that a control (a certain rotation mode) appears on the rotating body 1236. Therefore, in the process of this step S604, it is considered as the control structure where the execution opportunity is granted every time the small hitting game start processing (step S190) is done, fluctuation of the special symbol every time the execution opportunity is granted Control is performed to cause the rotor 1236 to appear to move according to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) after the end of the stop symbol (the appearance of the stop symbol).

  The small hit interval start command set in the process of step S603 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the interval before the start of the small hit game comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  Then, after the small hitting start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the small hitting start interval timer has been set in the process of the above-mentioned step S601 every time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next In the process of step S611, it is determined whether or not the small hit start interval timer is 0, that is, the time set as the small hit game start interval has elapsed. And, in the process of step S611, as long as it is determined that the small hitting start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small hitting game has not elapsed (NO in step S611) Each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621.

  However, even if the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 in this way by the process of step S621, the execution opportunity of the process of the above-mentioned step S604 is given each time, thereby ending the variation of the special symbol A motion according to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) after (the appearance of the stop symbol) appears each time on the rotating body 1236. As will be described later, such movement (drive control) of the rotating body 1236 is continued by being carried over in the small hitting game process even after the small hitting game start process is finished, so that the special A constant movement (a fixed rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236 after the variation of the design is finished (the stop design appears).

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the small hitting start interval timer has become 0 in the process of the above-mentioned step S611, that is, the time set as the interval before the starting of the small hitting game has elapsed Then, the processing flag is updated to "4" to execute the small hit game (step S612), and when control of the rotating body 1236 is performed (step S604), this processing ends.

  In addition, about the small hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number). For example, when the disadvantaged small hit is obtained, while the relatively short time tends to be set (the expected value of the time length is relatively shortened), the advantageous small hit is obtained. Sometimes, if it is made to have a tendency to set a relatively long time (to make the expected value of time length relatively long), the degree of expectation that an advantageous small hit is obtained by the length of the small hit interval Will be able to show.

  In addition, when a small hit is obtained in the short time game state, the short time function is maintained even in such a small hit interval, and since entering the second starting opening 1153 is facilitated, the small hit symbol If the length of the interval before small hit game is changed according to the type (type determined by symbol random number), the ease of maintaining the second special symbol can be changed depending on the type of small hit symbol. It is also possible.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 1153 as an interval period before the start of at least the second special symbol side small hitting game when in the time saving gaming state Therefore, a long interval time of a sufficient length is always adopted, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery can be secured to the upper limit value in this long interval time. That is, in this case, while the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is secured up to the upper limit value (4), the second advantageous small hit game is performed, and the time saving game state is ended by the occurrence of the big hit game. As the second special symbol lottery, which has been secured up to the upper limit of suspension, is being sequentially digested in the normal gaming state, it is considered to have a high probability of 1/6, etc. It becomes possible to provide in-hold chance games such as whether it is possible to obtain a second advantageous small hit, a big hit).

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to realize such in-hold chance game, in the interval period before the start of the small hitting game, not the prize winning opening 1155 but the second starting opening 1153 It is supposed that control is made to make the effect image prompting the player to enter the game ball. According to such a configuration, prior to starting the jackpot game, it is possible to secure the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery up to the upper limit thereof, as well as opening the second starting opening 1153 and the prize winning opening From the positional relationship with the member 1221, it is possible to secure the gaming balls to be in the waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the winning feature opening / closing member 1221.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the small hit game processing (step S210), first, the main control MPU 4100a is in a state where the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S701. It is determined whether or not the small hit game execution flag indicating the is in the on state. As a result, when the small hit game execution flag is not in the on state, the type of the small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantage) as the processing of step S702 to start the control related to the execution of the small hit game. An open pattern according to the small hit, the first small hit, and the second small hit) and an open timer for measuring the time required to execute the control according to the open pattern are set. Next, as the processing in step S703 and step S704, the small hit game execution flag is operated to indicate that control to execute the small hit game is already in progress, and a small hit start command is set. Do. Then, when drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed as the process of step S705, this process is temporarily ended.

  As described above, with regard to the drive control of the rotating body 1236 (step S705), the control content (step S604) in the small hit game start process is executed as it is, and the variation of the special symbol is The control for operating the rotating body 1236 is performed based on the elapsed time since the termination (the stop symbol appears). As a result, after the variation of the special symbol is finished (the stop symbol appears), a constant movement (constant rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236.

  After the small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress in the process of step S 701 each time the interrupt processing is performed. In the process of step S711, it is determined whether or not the prize closing flag indicating that the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied is in the on state, and the prize closing flag is If it is not in the on state, it is determined in the processing of steps S712 and S713 whether or not the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied.

  Here, in the process of step S712, a determination is made as to whether or not the open timer is 0, that is, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game has reached a predetermined upper limit time. In the process of step S713, whether or not the total number of gaming balls that have won in the prize winning opening 1155 during the small hitting game period has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 10) Judgment is made.

  If it is determined as a result of these processes that the release timer is not yet zero and the total number of winnings has not reached the predetermined upper limit (10 here), the process proceeds to step S714. The control according to the set open pattern is executed. As a result, as long as the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is not satisfied, the movement concerning the opening and closing of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 through the process of step S714 (slide operation) ) Is to be updated (managed), and thus the above-mentioned role with the opening pattern according to the type of small hits (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit). A small hit game in which the item winning opening / closing member 1221 opens and closes can be realized. The details of the opening pattern according to the type of small hit (the first advantageous small hit, the second advantageous small hit, the first small disadvantage, the second small penalty) will be described later.

  In this way, after the control according to the opening pattern is executed, whether or not the specific sensor 1239 for detecting that the gaming ball has been accepted in the V winning hole (specific area) 1156 is turned on as the process of step S715. To judge. As a result, when it is determined that the gaming ball has been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (specific sensor 1239 is in the on state), the V winning opening during the small hit game is executed as the processing of step S716. In the specific area) 1156, the V history flag indicating that there has been acceptance is operated in the on state. Then, next, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed as the process of step S705, this process is temporarily ended.

  When it is determined that the specific sensor 1239 is not in the on state in the process of step S715, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed in the process of step S705 without operating the V history flag in the on state. When this process is performed, this process is temporarily ended.

  Such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705) is performed each time the interrupt processing is performed unless the closing condition (steps S712, S713) of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied, whereby the prize winning opening is opened. While updating (managing) the movement for opening and closing the member 1221 and the movement for rotating the rotary body 1236 each time, it is possible to provide a game aiming at an opportunity for the specific sensor 1239 to be turned on.

  Then, as a result of such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705) being repeatedly performed, in the process of step S712, the open timer is 0, that is, an elapsed time from the start of the small hit game is predetermined. It is determined that the upper limit time has been reached, or in the process of step S713, the total number of gaming balls that have won in the prize winning opening 1155 during the small hitting game period is a predetermined upper limit value (here, When it is determined that the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied, each process (steps S721 to S723) for closing the prize winning opening 1155 is performed. Become.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first performs control of closing the prize winning opening 1155 by closing the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 as the process of step S721. Next, as a process of step S 722 and step S 723, an after-closing interval timer is set which counts the time from closing of the prize winning opening 1155, and the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied. Turn on the item closure flag shown. As a result, a new game ball will not enter the internal area of the winning combination winning opening 1155 in the small hit game process.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when there is a game ball heading to the V prize winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game, The game ball is held at a position where it can not be accepted by the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 until the closing condition is satisfied, and the holding is released after the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied. By doing this, a control (steps S604 and 705) and a structure (see FIG. 120) for enabling the game ball to be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 are provided.

  Therefore, the post-closing interval timer is set with a time longer than the time required for the held game ball to be accepted by the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (step S 722), and step S 731. Until it is determined that the time-up has occurred in the processing of, each time the interrupt processing is performed, the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress (YES in step S 701), and A process (step S732) in which the timer value of the interval timer after closing is determined while it is determined that the closing condition of the item winning opening 1155 is satisfied (YES in step S711); V history flag is turned on on condition that the game ball has been received to a specific area) 1156 Process that is operated (step S715, S716), and processing according to the drive control of the rotating member 1236 is be sequentially performed respectively (step S705).

  However, in this case, in the process of step S705, the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to appear a certain action is ended based on the elapsed time after the variation of the special symbol is finished (the stop symbol appears), As control after the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is established, the above-mentioned rotating body 1236 is shown in FIG. 120 (b) (the game ball held by the game is being transferred to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156). Control to be displaced) is performed.

  Then, as a result of repeating such processing (steps S732, S715, S716, S705), when the interval timer after closing is timed up (YES in step S731), each processing for ending the small hit game (step S741) ~ Perform steps S746 and S751).

  That is, main control MPU 4100a, first, if the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S741), the upper limit for which the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating is predetermined. It is determined whether the value has been reached (step S742). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time saving game state is ended when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit. It is decided to stop the time saving function assuming that the condition to be satisfied is established, and if the final change is a symbol variation according to the small hitting, stop the time saving function at the timing when the small hitting game is finished (Step S743). As a result, since the time saving function will be continued until the small hit game has been digested even after the small hit symbol is stopped, it is preferable to hold the special symbol in the short time game state. It will be possible to maintain it, which will be described later.

  After that, when it is determined that the V history flag is in the on state (YES in step S744), it is assumed that the game ball is accepted to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game process, In order to start the big hit game, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S 745), and various flags operated in the small hitting game processing (small hitting game execution flag, bonus closing flag, V history flag, etc. ) Is terminated (step S746), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the V history flag is not in the on state (NO in step S744), it is assumed that there is no acceptance of the gaming ball to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game processing. The processing flag is updated to "0" (step S751), and various flags operated in the small hitting game processing (small hitting game execution flag, bonus closing flag, V history flag, etc.) are turned off. At this point (step S746), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the process of step S301 is suspended.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, whenever it is detected that the ball has been entered into the prize winning hole 1155 by the prize winning hole sensor 1224, a command indicating that is set. There is. Although this will be described later, it is possible to display an effect image suitable for the entering ball by the control of the peripheral control board 4010 side.

[About the big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start processing (step S230) executed when the processing flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in the big hit game start process (step S230), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (big hit start interval timer) that counts an interval before the big hit game start as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in the completed state. As a result, if the big hit start interval timer is not yet set, the condition device is operated as the process of step S802, and the time saving function is operated as the process of steps S803 and S804. (YES in step S803), the operation is stopped. That is, after the preparation is completed, the big hit start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S 805 and S 806 to start the big hit game start interval, and when the big hit interval start command is set, this processing is performed. It will end once.

  The big hit interval start command set in the process of step S806 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the interval before the start of the big hit game comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of the above-mentioned step S801 every time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S811 In the processing of, it is judged whether or not the big hit start interval timer is 0, that is, whether the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has passed or not. Then, as long as it is determined in the process of step S811 that the big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S811), Every time the jackpot game start process (step S230) is performed, the jackpot start interval timer is decremented by one as the process of step S821.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the big hit start interval timer has become 0 in the processing of the above-mentioned step S811, that is, it is determined that the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed, When the processing flag is updated to "6" to execute the jackpot game (step S812), this processing is ended.

  As for the big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of big hit symbol (the type determined by symbol random number).

[About the big hit game processing]
Next, the big hit game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 140, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the big hit game execution flag is in the on state. As a result, when the big hit game execution flag is not in the on state, the opening mode according to the type of big hit as the processing of step S 902 to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the second attack device 2150 (Set the number of rounds, the open time of each round, the maximum number of winnings for each round).

  As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the fact that only the 15R time shorts are prepared as the type of big hit, when the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game Also, since a round game is to generate a big hit game that is performed for 15 times, "15 times" is always set as the number of rounds in the process of step S902. However, for the opening time of each round and the maximum winning number for each round, the case of the first special symbol side (big hit game according to the winning of the first big hit) and the second special symbol side (second big hit) By being set in a different manner with the jackpot game according to the win, it is possible that the jackpot game on the second special symbol side (the jackpot game according to the jackpot of the second jackpot) can obtain a large amount of awards I have to.

  More specifically, when a big hit game according to the first special symbol side lottery result (first big hit, first small win) is played, an award that can obtain about 400 game balls is available. While the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined by the mode to be awarded, the jackpot game according to the second special symbol side lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) line When it is determined, the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined in such a manner that an award capable of acquiring about 2000 game balls is given.

  After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, the big hit game running flag is turned on to indicate that the control for the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as processing of step S903 and step S904. At the same time, when the jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control concerning the execution of the big hit game is already in progress in the processing of the above-mentioned step S901 every time the interrupt processing is performed. In the process of the next step S911, it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been digested. Then, in the process of step S911, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is determined that it is a halfway stage of control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S911). Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, control corresponding to the set release pattern is executed as the process of step S912. Thereby, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) concerning opening and closing of the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 through the process of step S912 is updated (managed) As a result, a big hit game in which the big winning opening opening and closing member 1203 is opened and closed is realized with an opening pattern according to the type of the big hit.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in this embodiment, it is supposed that the command which shows that is set every time each round game is complete | finished, while a round game is repeated 15 times. As a result, by the control of the peripheral control board 4010, it is possible to display an effect image respectively suitable for each round game.

  And, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it is determined that all the control for the execution of the big hit game has been completed. (YES in step S911), each process (step S921, step S922, step S931, step S941, step S942) for generating an end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (big hit end interval timer) for clocking the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S921). As a result, when the big hit end interval timer is not set yet, the big hit end interval timer is set as the processing of the steps S941 and S942 to start the big hit game end interval, and the big hit interval end command is set. When set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The big hit interval end command set in the process of step S942 is sent to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the big hit game end interval comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of the above-mentioned step S921 each time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S922 In the processing of, it is judged whether or not the big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the big hit game end interval has passed. Then, in the process of step S922, as long as it is determined that the big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S922), Every time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, the big hit end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S931.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, when it is determined that the big hit end interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S922, that is, it is determined that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed, Each process (step S923-step S928) for ending the said big hit game will be performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the big hit game execution flag in the OFF state, which indicates that the control for the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S923. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for activating the time saving function (YES in step S924), the time saving function is controlled to shift to the time saving gaming state (step S925). ).

  Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S926), and when the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S927), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the process of step S301 is suspended.

  According to such a big hit game process, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the process of step S911, the corresponding big winning opening 1154 is an opening mode (according to the type of the big hit ( In step S912), the game is repeatedly released, so that the player can obtain an award according to the type of the big hit.

[About a small hit game]
FIG. 142 shows the opening status of the prize winning hole 1155 and the prize being prized when the small hitting game (first disadvantageous small hitting, second disadvantageous small hitting, first advantageous small hitting, second advantageous small hitting) is performed It is a time chart which shows the example about the relation with the operation state of rotation object (sorting device) 1236 in the inside field of mouth 1155. The control shown in FIG. 142 is executed by the main control MPU 4100a in a control-progressing manner, for example, every 4 ms by the small hit gaming process (see FIG. 138).

  As described above, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment has the receiving position where the receiving portion 1236a faces upward (FIG. 124 (a)) and the discharging position where the receiving portion 1236a faces rightward. It can be rotated between (FIG. 124 (b)). Then, in the state where the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position, only the gaming ball supplied first among the gaming balls received by the prize winning opening 1155 is held by the receiving portion 1236a, and the other gaming balls are obtained. Is supplied to the missing hole 1230c. Then, when the rotary body 1236 is pivoted to the release position, the held gaming ball is released from the rotary body 1236 so as to be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, when the receiving portion 1236a is in the discharge position facing the right, the rotary body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment receives any of the game balls received by the prize winning opening 1155. It also has a function of supplying the lost hole 1230c so that the game ball can not be received in the V winning opening 1156 without being held by the portion 1236a.

  In this respect, in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), regardless of the type of the small hit, from the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the small hit appears It turns so that a fixed movement appears. Note that such an operation is realized by performing the process of step S604 or the process of step S705 described above each time the interrupt process is performed.

  Further, as described above, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, at least two on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state as long as the player continues to hit the right. It is formed with the structure which can make the above (two or three) game balls exist as a prize waiting state to the prize winning hole 1155.

[About the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained]
As shown in FIG. 142 (d), the second advantageous small hit (lottery on the second special symbol side) is realized while the structure of such a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 and the special down flow passage is realized. In the small hit game when the player is obtained, first, a plurality of game balls are made to wait for a prize on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) which is in the closed state by the player right-handed At a time (0.02 seconds) slightly later than the timing when the time required for the rotation comes, and slightly (0.02 seconds) than the timing t2 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position. Control is performed to slide the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state.

  However, here, the timing t2 is set such that the timing t2 arrives in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received by the prize winning opening 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, according to this slide operation, while the rotary body 1236 is in the accommodation position (a state in which the holding of the gaming ball to the receiving portion 1236a is enabled), the prize winning opening 1155 is put in a waiting condition for winning Although there are a plurality of game balls available immediately and collectively, they are not in the storage position by the time the game balls reach the rotary body 1236, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the missing hole 1230c. And it will be discharged.

  The reason why such high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the drive of the V prize solenoid 1232 instead of the motor, and the prize winning This is because the rotary body 1236 can be displaced from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotary body 1236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of gaming balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the top surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is Regardless of the degree, the above-mentioned structure is formed with a structure that can be quickly and collectively entered into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 whenever the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened. As you did. At this point, at timing t2, after the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of small hit appears comes, it waits for a plurality of gaming balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). After that, the slide operation (open only for a very short time (0.12 seconds) required for the plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to enter at once into the prize winning opening 1155 The control to be performed is performed.

  According to the control at such timing t2, all the game balls are lost holes despite entering the plurality of game balls in the prize waiting state into the prize winning opening 1155 in a very short opening time. Since the small hit game open time (1.8 seconds at the maximum) is wasted because it is distributed to 1230c and discharged, the game ball accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 is the above-mentioned V winning opening without wasting it It becomes possible to suitably reduce the probability of being accepted by 1156 (probability of machine drawing).

  Moreover, according to such control, basically, only the game balls already existing in the waiting state for winning on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) It becomes possible to win only when the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 is opened. That is, in this case, the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately, so the probability of being accepted by the V winning opening 1156 (probability of machine lottery) Can be suitably controlled.

  Then, after the prize product winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed in this manner, it waits for the timing t3 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. After that, control is performed to slide the combination prize opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state again for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

  Here, as is apparent from FIGS. 142 (d) and 142 (e), at the time the timing t3 comes, at least the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is Since two or more (two or three) gaming balls are present as waiting for winning, these gaming balls are immediately put together in the prize winning opening 1155 by the slide operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. Be accepted. Moreover, at timing t3, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the release position to the storage position, any one of the game balls received collectively in the prize winning opening 1155 is It will always be held by the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball held in this manner is released from the rotating body 1236 when the timing t4 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 shifts from the storage position to the release position comes, the V winning hole It will be accepted to 1156.

  However, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), there are a plurality of prize winning opening opening / closing members 1221 within the period of timing t1 to t4. Control for maintaining the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) only for the time required to supply the game balls (here, three or more), and the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 The control to slide from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed for five times.

  That is, in this case, every time the slide function (opening operation) is performed for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state, the prize product opening / closing member 1221 within the period of timing t1 to t4. Each game ball will be accepted by the prize winning opening 1155. And in view of such an acceptance situation, usually, when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the small hit game (when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) In the small hit game), the upper limit (10 at the maximum) of the game balls allowed to be won is reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  In this respect, when the upper limit value of the gaming ball that can be won is reached when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the opening / closing control of the winning combination opening / closing member 1221 is performed. In addition to being terminated (FIG. 138: step S 721), the control to cause the rotating body 1236 to appear a certain action based on the elapsed time (the elapsed time from the timing t 1) after the appearance of the stop symbol is ended Instead of this, control for displacing the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position is performed. By this, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game (the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) will be ended before the timing t4 comes, and thus, A big hit game corresponding to the game ball being accepted in the V winning opening 1156 can be made executable.

  In addition, in a state where the rotary body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position holds the gaming ball in the receiving portion 1236a, the holding gaming ball may be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. Among the determined items, all the game balls accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 are distributed to the lost hole 1230c and discharged. According to such a configuration, for example, during the period from timing t3 to t4, while the game ball is surely supplied to the V winning opening 1156 in the future, the game in which the prize winning opening 1155 is entered It is possible to preferably reduce the probability that the ball will be distributed to the V winning opening 1156 (probability of machine lottery).

  However, even in a small hit game when such a second advantageous small hit is obtained, the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won if the right hit by the player is not continued Timing t4 arrives without reaching 10) and the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (the small hit game when the second favorable small hit is obtained) reaches a predetermined upper limit time (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

  That is, in this case, in addition to the end of the opening and closing control of the winning combination opening and closing member 1221 when reaching the upper limit time (FIG. 138: step S721), the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (timing t1 Control to cause the rotating body 1236 to appear a constant motion based on the elapsed time from the above, and instead, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the discharge position instead. Control will be performed. As a result, if there is a game ball accepted to the V prize opening 1156, the big hit game is made executable, but if there is no game ball accepted to the V prize opening 1156, the big hit game is not executed Next to the special symbol will be performed.

  As described above, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time, as long as the player continues to hit the right. A jackpot game advantageous to the player by supplying any one of many game balls to the V prize opening 1156 while appropriately reducing the probability of being accepted by the V prize opening 1156 (the probability of machine lottery). Can be started (corresponds to "winning").

  In addition, the short opening (only one second is 0.12 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball by the ball firing device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 Even though the operation (a short opening operation in which the expected value for winning is less than one in calculation) is performed, a plurality of game balls are made to the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 each time the short opening operation appears. To make it possible to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of game ball prizes per unit time when the prize winning hole 1155 is in the open state, and such excellent prize performance suppresses the decrease in the game fun. It can be done.

  As described above, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning hole opening / closing member 1221 (in the presence of a plurality of game balls kept waiting for a prize during a relatively long closing interval) By performing the short opening operation by the door part 1221a) a plurality of times, the total opening time (0.6 seconds) of the prize winning opening 1155 itself is short but many (10 or more) gaming balls are inside It is made to be able to enter. However, in order to set the machine lottery probability to a low probability value of about 1/10 or less, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), the game ball waits for a game ball aiming at timing t2 guided to the lost hole 1230. 124. A short opening operation of the winning combination opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state is performed so that the state is released, or the operating state (housing shown in FIG. While being held at the position (at timings t3 to t4), the short opening operation by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, even when many (10 or more) game balls can be entered into the inner area when opening the winning combination winning opening 1155, to the above-mentioned V winning opening 1156 The game balls to be induced are limited to the game balls initially supplied to the rotating body 1236 while the rotating body 1236 is maintained in the operation state (accommodating position) shown in FIG. 124 (a). It will be. That is, in this case, even if the game ball launch by the player is temporarily delayed, at least one game ball may enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 at timings t3 to t4. For example, it is possible to finally receive the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, since each other game ball different from the game ball initially supplied to the rotating body 1236 comes to be induced to the missing hole 1230, one small hit game (plural While the game ball is being induced to the V winning opening 1156 while the short opening operation by the game is performed, the machine lottery probability is maintained at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less Will be able to

[About the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit was obtained]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) is obtained is similarly first closed by the player's right strike. It is after the timing when the time required for the plurality of gaming balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the state comes and the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 At a timing (0.02 seconds) slightly earlier than the timing t2 at which the housing pivots from the storage position to the discharge position, control is performed to slide the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state.

  Also, similarly, in this slide operation, setting is made such that the timing t2 arrives in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received by the prize winning opening 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. It is assumed. Therefore, according to this slide operation, while the rotary body 1236 is in the accommodation position (a state in which the holding of the gaming ball to the receiving portion 1236a is enabled), the prize winning opening 1155 is put in a waiting condition for winning Although there are a plurality of game balls available immediately and collectively, they are not in the storage position by the time the game balls reach the rotary body 1236, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the missing hole 1230c. And it will be discharged.

  However, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, the time for which a new game ball can be supplied while sliding is being operated (time slightly longer than the firing interval (sliding interval) as sliding operation time. In addition to a plurality of game balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) which is in a closed state by adopting 0.62 seconds)). The game ball supplied anew is also made to be able to win a prize winning opening 1155.

  Moreover, in the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, the slide operation is not performed again after the slide operation of 0.62 seconds is completed, and the small hit game ( The elapsed time from the start of the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained is set to reach a predetermined upper limit time (the above-mentioned open timer has timed up) (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

  As described above, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, although it is possible to win a plurality of gaming balls in the prize winning opening 1155, any of these gaming balls is the above-mentioned V winning opening It is not accepted in 1156. Therefore, there is no possibility that a big hit game can be performed due to this small hit game (corresponding to "dropout").

[About each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit, the first advantageous small hit was obtained]
In the small hit game when the above-mentioned first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, but when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, and the execution process of the small hit game itself can function as an expected effect It has become.

  That is, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit (lottery of the first special symbol side) and the first advantageous small hit (lottery of the first special symbol side) are obtained, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), from the timing t1 until the timing t8 described later comes, an operation is performed to open and close the winning feature opening / closing member 1221 in the same or similar manner as each other.

  The first operation is the same as in the other small hit games, until a plurality of gaming balls are supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) which is in the closed state by right hitting by the player. At a time (0.02 seconds) slightly later than the timing when the time required for the rotation comes, and slightly (0.02 seconds) than the timing t2 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position. A control is performed to slide the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for a very short opening time (0.12 seconds).

  Also here, with respect to the timing at which the slide operation is performed, the time required for the game ball received by the winning feature winning opening 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236 by the slide operation is dauntlessly shorter than the time required for the game ball to The timing t2 is set to come. Therefore, according to this slide operation, while the rotary body 1236 is in the accommodation position (a state in which the holding of the gaming ball to the receiving portion 1236a is enabled), the prize winning opening 1155 is put in a waiting condition for winning Although there are a plurality of game balls available immediately and collectively, they are not in the storage position by the time the game balls reach the rotary body 1236, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the missing hole 1230c. And it will be discharged.

  The reason why such high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the drive of the V prize solenoid 1232 instead of the motor, and the prize winning This is because the rotary body 1236 can be displaced from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotary body 1236.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, timing t3 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the release position to the storage position comes After that, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened from the closed state within a period from when the rotary body (sorting device) 1236 rotates to return from the storage position to the discharge position. There is no sliding movement to. Therefore, the opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (thereby, the chance of being assigned to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156) is not provided yet. Control concerning the operation after timing t4 is performed.

  That is, first, at timing t4 at which a relatively long closing interval (11.4 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are waiting for winning have extremely short opening times (0.12 seconds) and a prize winning opening It is possible to enter the ball collectively to 1155, but by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the release position, so Those game balls are all distributed to the missing hole 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at timing t5 when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from this timing t4, the rotating body (assignment device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and the timing 5 to 2.5 seconds is At the elapsed timing t6, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 pivots from the storage position to the discharge position again.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is closed to open even within the period of timing t5 to t6. There is no slide action. Therefore, the opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (thereby, the chance of being assigned to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156) is not provided yet. Control concerning the operation after timing t6 is performed.

  That is, first, at timing t6 at which a relatively long closing interval (8.88 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of gaming balls that are waiting for winning are extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) and the prize winning opening It is possible to enter the ball collectively to 1155, but by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the release position, so Those game balls are all distributed to the missing hole 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at timing t7 at which 6.5 seconds have elapsed from this timing t6, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and 2.5 seconds from this timing t7. At the elapsed timing t8, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is turned again from the storage position to the discharge position.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is closed to open even within the period of timing t7 to t8. There is no slide action. Therefore, the opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (thereby, the chance of being assigned to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156) is not provided yet. Control concerning the operation after timing t8 is performed.

  As described above, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, a plurality of game balls are displayed before the timing t8 when the stop symbol appears at the timing t1. The control of maintaining the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) only for a sufficient time to be in the prize waiting state, and the extremely short time (0. 0 of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221). The control of causing the sliding operation (opening operation) to be performed for 12 seconds is repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, each time a very short slide operation (opening operation) is performed, it is possible to cause a plurality of gaming balls that are waiting for winning to enter the prize winning opening 1155. In any of these slide motions (opening motions), the rotating body (sorting unit) 1236 with respect to the operating condition of the rotating body (sorting unit) 1236 which performs a fixed motion after the stop symbol appears at the timing t1. Timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the storage position (more precisely, the receiving portion 1236a is positioned in the storage position by the time the game ball entering the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a It is supposed to be done with the aim of

  That is, in the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, a stop symbol appears at the timing t1 until the timing t8 comes. In the meantime, all the game balls entered into the prize winning opening 1155 are all distributed to the lost hole 1230c so that the return thereof is not determined, and the same as the opening manner, (or Approximation) is to be given. As a result, the execution process of the small hit game itself can be functioned as an expected effect that can be made aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained (timing t1 to t8).

  In addition, in such a relatively long period of the timings t1 to t8, expectation rendering may be performed in which the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained in the rendering display device 1115 may be realized.

  That is, as described above, in the period of timing t1 to t8, although the game in which many game balls are made to win for the prize winning opening 1155 is provided, for the closing interval having a relatively long time The time during which the prize winning opening 1155 is in the open state is relatively short (more precisely, as a short time (0.12 seconds) for the game ball that has already been fired to be able to win). It is supposed to be controlled. Therefore, if a predetermined effect (expected effect capable of making it possible to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained) is performed during such a period of timing t1 to t8, the prize winning opening 1155 Since it is easy to concentrate on the presentation while the game player is closed for a relatively long time (closing interval), it is possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in the period of timing t1 to t8, the closed interval having a relatively long time and the game ball kept in the above-mentioned prize waiting state although it is a relatively short time to the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 And a short opening period that allows entry into the room repeatedly appears, so it is possible to realize a low rendition of tension when it is in the closing interval (you may be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained It is possible to periodically generate a highly tense game effect on whether or not the game ball can be accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while the effect is basically appearing. Thus, this also makes it possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 142 (b) and (c), when the timing t8 comes, a small hit game and a first advantageous small hit are obtained when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained. Among small hit games of the time, only when the small hit game opening and closing member 1221 is extremely short (0.12 seconds) only when the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained is performed Since the slide operation (opening operation), it is recognized which of the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained or the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained. It will be possible.

  In addition, the slide operation (opening operation) at this timing t8 is, as in the case of the above, a plurality of game balls that are waiting for winning in the prize winning opening 1155 in a very short opening time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to enter the ball at one time, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the release position, Are all distributed to the missing hole 1230c and discharged.

  And, in the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained, it is possible to win when the slide operation (opening operation) is performed for a very short opening time (0.12 seconds) at timing t8. By reaching the upper limit value of the game ball (10 at maximum for small hit games), or when the above-mentioned open timer times out at a predetermined timing thereafter (FIG. 138: YES in step S712) The game ball is not received in the mouth 1156 without being accepted. Therefore, there is no possibility that the big hit game can be performed due to the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained (corresponding to a "dropout").

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the above-mentioned time is sufficient for the plurality of gaming balls to be in the prize waiting state. While maintaining the prize product opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval), it waits for the timing t9 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. Thus, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is caused to slide (open) for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

  That is, in this case, if the right hitting is continued, at least two (two or three) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. As a result, the slide operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed. As a result, regardless of the number of gaming balls in the waiting for winning state, those gaming balls are immediately and collectively accepted to the prize winning opening 1155, and one of these gaming balls is one. The receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position always holds it.

  And after this, the elapsed time after the small hit game (the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) is started at timing t10 reaches a predetermined upper limit time (FIG. 138: step) The control of displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, a big hit game corresponding to the game ball being accepted in the V winning opening 1156 can be made executable.

  However, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), there are a plurality of prize winning opening opening / closing members 1221 within the period of timing t1 to t9. Control for maintaining the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) only for the time required to supply the game balls (here, three or more), and the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 The control to slide from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed for four times.

  That is, in this case, every time the slide function (opening operation) is performed for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state, the prize product opening / closing member 1221 within the period of timing t1 to t9, 2, 3 Each game ball will be accepted by the prize winning opening 1155. Then, in view of such an acceptance situation, when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed, a prize is won in the small hit game (a small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) There is also a possibility that the upper limit (10 at the maximum) of the game balls made possible will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  In this respect, when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed, when the upper limit value of the gaming balls that can be won is reached, the opening / closing control of the winning combination opening / closing member 1221 is ended. In addition to that (Fig. 138: step S721), the control to cause the above-mentioned rotating body 1236 to appear a certain action based on the elapsed time (the elapsed time from the timing t1) since the appearance of the stop symbol is ended. Instead of this, control is performed to displace the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game are ended before timing t10 comes, and thus a big hit corresponding to the game ball being accepted in the V prize opening 1156. The game will be playable.

  However, in the small hit game when an advantageous small hit is obtained, the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (thus, in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) The upper limit (up to 10 at maximum) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is reached before the timing when the allocated opportunity is given comes, and the V winning opening (specific area) It is required that the small hit game is not ended without being distributed to 1156.

  For example, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the bonus hole 1155 is opened for a short time three times while the maximum number of three game balls can be in a waiting state for winning. At timing t9 after that, control is performed to open the prize winning opening 1155 for a short time so that the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. That is, in this case, it is possible to win only 9 game balls smaller than the upper limit (10 at the maximum) in the prize winning opening 1155 until the timing t9 comes, so the V winning opening (specified The small hit game does not end without being distributed to the area 1156).

  In this manner, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time, as long as the player continues to hit the right. A jackpot game advantageous to the player by supplying any one of many game balls to the V prize opening 1156 while appropriately reducing the probability of being accepted by the V prize opening 1156 (the probability of machine lottery). Can be started (corresponds to "winning").

  Also, in both the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the hit ball launcher 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 The short opening operation (the calculated expected winning value is less than 1) in which the winning combination 1155 is not opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) equal to or less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball Each time the short opening action appears, the plurality of game balls that have already been fired and are in the waiting for prize state are transferred to the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155. It is made to be able to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of game ball prizes per unit time when the prize winning hole 1155 is in the open state, and such excellent prize performance suppresses the decrease in the game fun. It can be done.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "Basically, the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) already exists as a waiting state for winning" By adopting a configuration in which only the game ball can win only when the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 is opened, the timing when the gaming ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. As mentioned above, it is possible to In this respect, in each small hit game described above, by utilizing such an accurate control performance, the above-mentioned prize winning prize opening 1155 is generated at the timing at which the gaming ball in the waiting for winning state is guided to the V prize opening 1156. It is possible to selectively use the control for opening the game and the control for opening the prize winning opening 1155 at the timing at which the game ball in the prize waiting state is guided to the lost hole 1230c. It is made to realize the playability which a small hit game should bear.

  Further, as described above, according to the small hit games (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) While having a structure in which the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface is controlled so as not to exceed "L / 2T", every time the prize winning opening 1155 is opened, the prize is prized prior to this This is maintained in the closed state (closing interval) only for the time (at least 1.2 seconds or more) required for supplying the plurality of gaming balls to the mouth opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). As a result, as long as the player continues to hit the right, at least two (two or three) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. Will be able to exist as.

  In addition, since it becomes possible to play a game so that at least two or more game balls T are regularly present in a specific rolling area (upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a)) in this way, Every time the winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened, excellent winning performance is realized such that a plurality of gaming balls can win, thereby giving a sense of speed to the winning situation in the prize winning opening 1155. Will be able to

  In addition, as described above, according to each small hit game (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, all the game balls that are in the waiting for winning state play the role. The position at which the game ball that has entered the inner area is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 1224 (with respect to the number of game balls that can be won) than the global entry time required to enter the inner area of the item winning port 1155 A plurality of game balls are provided each time the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened while the internal passage is provided in which the time required to reach the upper limit judgment time) is longer. Since it is possible to win a prize, it is possible to actively generate an overflow prize for the upper limit value of the gaming ball which is made possible to win, and dynamic prize performance and award winning performance exceeding the set value. It becomes possible to present.

  By actively generating such overflow winnings, the number of gaming balls exceeding the upper limit (10 at the maximum) of gaming balls allowed to be won in a small hit game can be obtained as a prize winning opening 1155. If you are allowed to enter the inner area of addicts regularly, and such excellent winning performance, be sure to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 in the regulations for each small hit game described above Even in this case, it is possible to set the machine lottery probability lower than approximately 1/10.

  Moreover, as described above, according to the small hit games (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) A direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls so that a plurality of game balls being in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface almost simultaneously fall into the prize winning opening 1155 The prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is opened in a structure in which it is possible to slide all of the gaming balls that are in a very short time and waiting for a prize to be received. Every time it is used, the opening time is much shorter (less than half, 0.12 seconds) than the firing distance (0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the hitting and launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 Decide to There.

  According to such a configuration, although the short opening operation in which the expected value for winning is less than one is performed in calculation, the predetermined closing interval time elapses each time the short opening operation appears. Since it becomes possible to enter at least two or more game balls T, which are in the wait for winning state, into the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 almost simultaneously, the unit time per unit time when in the open state It will be possible to dramatically increase the number of winning prizes of the game ball T, and in the small hit game in which the upper limit time is determined, a large amount of the open time (1.8 seconds at the maximum) may be consumed without waste. You will be able to win the game ball

  Furthermore, according to the small hit games (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, such a short opening operation can be performed using a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 Timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the storage position (more precisely, the receiving portion 1236a is positioned in the storage position by the time the game ball entering the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a It is supposed to aim at the appearance of Alternatively, if the short opening operation is performed when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is in the accommodation position, the above-mentioned opening timer will time out, or the upper limit value of the gaming balls that can be won The receiver 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is prevented from being displaced to the discharge position unless any condition of reaching 10 (at most 10 in a small hit game) is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the probability that the game ball accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted by the V winning opening 1156 (the probability of the machine lottery).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, high speed rotation by the rotating body 1236 is realized by the drive of the V prize solenoid 1232 instead of the motor, and thereby the gaming ball accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 Makes it possible to displace the rotor 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the wheel 1213 to reach the rotor 1236. Therefore, the short opening operation of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed at the timing (for example, timing t4, t6, t8, etc.) for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position. In the case where the short opening operation is performed, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation that does not cause the winning combination winning opening 1155 to win a prize. In addition, the short opening operation of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed at the timing (for example, timing t3, t9, etc.) for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the discharge position to the storage position. In such a case, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation for winning the prize winning opening 1155.

Also, in order to realize the above-mentioned excellent winning performance when a small hit (favorable small hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the point is,
・ The number of game balls that can be made to be addicted as a waiting for winning condition on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state is “N (in this embodiment, at most three)”,
-The upper limit number-of-players setting value of the game ball allowed to enter the internal area of the prize winning prize opening 1155 when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened is "X (this implementation 10) and “Y (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds)” of the firing interval time of the gaming ball.
When you do, time setting value which is permitted as operation time to opening state by the prize winning a prize opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) time shorter than “X · Y (6 seconds in this embodiment)” And T (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds). Then, on this, the operation to the open state by the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) "X / N (in this embodiment is the smallest integer larger than" 10/3 "4) The game balls that are said to be in the waiting state for prizes can be maintained for each operation mode when divided into and executed Z times (five times in this embodiment) or more times By setting the short open time in the above, while the sum of the short open times does not exceed the above T time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds), the above X (in this embodiment), It is possible to execute the open optimization control to open the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) so that the ten game balls can enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. It is required to do it.

  According to such a configuration, the operation to the open state by the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is Z times (short in this embodiment, 0.12 seconds) in this embodiment (this embodiment) In each of the five cases, the game balls (up to three in this embodiment) waiting for winning will be entered into the inner area every time they are divided into five times. Even though the total time does not exceed the T time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds), the above "X" (in this embodiment, ten) game balls are included in the prize winning opening 1155. It will be possible to enter the area, such a good winning performance will be able to suppress the decline in fun of gaming.

  Therefore, the number of gaming balls that can be addicted to the top surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state as waiting for winning is not necessarily two or more (two or three). . For example, even in the case of adopting a configuration in which “at least one or more gaming balls are made to be waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state”, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 As long as the game (continuing the right-handed game) is performed so that the state (waiting for winning prize) in which the gaming ball is present on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of (the door 1221a) is maintained, certain distribution As the game ball enters into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 at the correct timing guided to the V winning opening 1156 by the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 performing the operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) Therefore, it is possible to start the big hit game according to the acceptance to the V winning opening 1156 (big hit control). That is, in this case, it has a structure managed so that the maximum speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed "L / T".

  Also, even in the case where such a configuration (at least one or more gaming balls are made to be waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state) is basically adopted, The game ball which is already in waiting for winning state on the top surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is short so that it can enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 It is possible to operate the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state only for a time (a short time which refuses to win the game ball which is not in the prize waiting state) It is more desirable to enable more accurate control of the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155.

  In addition, the machine drawing probability in the case of adopting such a configuration (at least one or more gaming balls are put in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state) is also suitably selected. It is possible to set with a low probability value of “1/10” or less.

In other words, the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 is divided into ten or more short opening operations across a predetermined closing interval time and executed.
-As the predetermined closing interval time, a time (for example, 0.66 seconds) longer than one firing interval and shorter than two firing intervals is adopted, and the short opening time is The time required for the game ball in the prize waiting state to spill out to the prize winning hole 1155 by the slide operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0. If control is performed such that 12 seconds is adopted, the short opening operation appears each time the game balls sequentially fired are put into the prize waiting state at the predetermined closing interval time. That is, in this case, although it is a short opening operation shorter than the firing interval (in calculation, the expected value for winning is less than one), it is in a waiting state for winning every time the short opening operation is repeated ten times. One (two in rare case) game balls will win a prize, and by allowing only one of these game balls to be accepted by the V prize hole 1156, the machine lottery probability is approximately "1/10 ( In rare cases, it can be set to "less than 1/10").

  Furthermore, instead of the configuration of (b) described above, the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 can be divided into 10 or more short opening operations across a predetermined closing interval time and executed. B) If an internal passage is provided, in which the time taken for the game ball entering the inner area to reach the position detected by the prize winning opening sensor 1224 is longer than the time of the firing interval, 10 Even when the tenth game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 when the second short opening operation appears, the tenth gaming ball is detected by the prize winning sensor 1224 It is possible to cause the eleventh game ball to enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 by the eleventh short opening operation before reaching the position. That is, in this case, even if a configuration is adopted in which "at least one or more gaming balls are made to be waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in closed state", winning is possible. It is possible to actively generate overflow winnings for the upper limit value (up to 10 in a small hit game) of gaming balls.

  In addition, various structures of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) according to this embodiment and various controls in the small hit game are applied to the structure of the big winning opening opening and closing member 1203 and control in the big hit game respectively. You may do it. That is, in this case, the game ball per unit time when the game ball is addicted to the upper surface of the big winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in the closed state as the waiting for winning state or the big winning opening 1154 is opened. Dramatically increase the number of winnings, give a sense of speed to the winning status in the large winning opening 1154, or actively generate an overflow winning for the upper limit of the game ball that can be won in the big hit game It becomes possible to obtain excellent effects such as, etc. in the jackpot game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when there is an acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 1152, a lottery on the first special symbol side is performed, but in this lottery on the first special symbol side The probability that "winning" is obtained by the jackpot is higher than the probability that "winning" is obtained by the advantageous small hit (here, the first advantageous small hit). Therefore, in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the time saving function is not activated, usually, when the big hit is won according to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 1152, a big hit is played, and thus the time saving function It will be controlled to shift to the gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is activated.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is not activated (the normal gaming state), the game ball is not accepted in the second starting opening 1153 regardless of the result of the normal lottery. It is as having mentioned above that it is possessed. According to such a structure, the drawing of the second special symbol side held on hold when in the gaming state (time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving function is activated is digested when the time-saving gaming state Or, it will be digested only under any condition of being carried over at the time of transition control to the normal gaming state and being digested in the normal gaming state.

  That is, in this case, unless a "winning" is obtained in the first special symbol side lottery when in the normal gaming state, the time saving game state does not occur, and the second special symbol side lottery is not performed. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol can be positioned as a relatively rare event, and thus the lottery contents can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the big hit game according to the result of the drawing of the first special symbol side is performed, the time is shortened over the period until the drawing of the special symbol is digested 100 times. While the gaming state can be continued, in the second special symbol side lottery, the second advantageous small hit is obtained with a probability of approximately 1/6. In addition, since it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side in the time saving gaming state, when the time shortening gaming state is controlled, the drawing of the special symbol is usually 100. The second special small hit will be obtained in the second special symbol side lottery before it is digested.

  And, in the small hit game according to the second advantageous small hit obtained, as long as the player continues to hit the right, many game balls can be played in a short opening time. It is possible to enter the winning opening 1155, and any one of many gaming balls is always supplied to the V winning opening 1156 and the other gaming balls are supplied to the lost hole 1230c. The thing is as having mentioned above (refer FIG. 142 (c)). That is, in this case, the acceptance probability (probability of the machine lottery) in the V winning opening 1156 when the game ball enters the winning opening 1155 is suitably reduced while the winning probability opening 1155 is It becomes possible to generate a big hit game advantageous to the player by entering the game ball. However, this is also mentioned above, after the big hit game according to the lottery of the second special symbol side when being in time saving game state is played, it is controlled to the game state (normal game state) where time saving function does not operate It is supposed to be.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained by lottery, first, prior to the opening of the prize winning opening 1155, either the V winning opening 1156 or the missing hole 1230c. It is determined in advance based on the type of symbol that the gaming ball is to be induced (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit).

  That is, in general, in pachinko machines that generate a big hit game based on the induction of the game ball in a specific area, the movement of the game ball has a large influence on the game, and therefore cheating using a dog or magnet is There is a concern that this may reduce the fun of the person who is playing the game properly. Therefore, conventionally, it has been proposed to determine whether or not the fraud has been made through magnetic detection with a magnetic sensor, vibration detection with a vibration sensor, etc. However, based on the detection with such various sensors, it is illegal. When it is determined whether an action has been taken, there may be a case where an erroneous detection occurs in relation to a threshold for detection, or the opposite is not detected even though an illegal action is made.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, which one of the V winning hole 1156 and the lost hole 1230c is to be guided to the game ball is determined in advance based on the type of symbol. . And on this, even though the type of the determined symbol determines that the gaming ball is induced to the lost hole 1230c, the gaming ball is induced to the specific area (V winning opening 1156) In this case, external output is performed in a specific manner.

  According to the fraud management with such symbols, only by advancing the game according to the type of symbol within predetermined game control, when cheating is done, it will be output to the outside in a specific mode Therefore, it is suitably avoided that false detection or non-detection occurs in relation to the threshold value.

  Incidentally, such an external output is one of the processes of outputting the state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, the management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1 in the process of the above-mentioned step S16 (output data setting process) It is executed as a display output (for example, an image showing a game history) on the effect display device 1115 through command output to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like.

  For example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 131, when it is determined that the V winning opening 1156 has been guided in the process of step S14 (special control process) (YES in step S715 or step S744) In step S16 in the timer interrupt process (the same interrupt process), the type of symbol (result of the process of step S311) at the time of winning a small hit is confirmed.

  And as a result, if the type of symbol at the time of winning a small hit indicates an advantageous small hit (a first advantageous small hit, a second advantageous small hit), it is assumed that a big hit game is properly generated, Processing is performed to externally output a signal indicating that (step S16).

  On the other hand, if the type of the symbol at the time of the small hit is the one showing the disadvantageous small hit (the first small penalty, the second small penalty), it is to the V prize hole 1156 in the control concerning the progression of the game. Although the induction of the game ball is prevented from occurring, it is assumed that the induction of the game ball to the V winning hole 1156 has occurred, and a signal indicating that is outputted to the outside. (Step S16). However, even in this case, the specific sensor is turned on and the V history flag is turned on in steps S715 and S716 in the small hit gaming process (FIG. 138). Then, it is confirmed that the V history flag is on in the processing of step S744, and the processing flag is updated to 5 in the processing of step S745, so that the big hit game will be executed.

  In this case, notification processing for notifying of an abnormality may also be performed. However, it is difficult to completely exclude the possibility that the induction of the game ball to the V winning hole 1156 occurred due to the combination of various rare events despite the fact that the proper game is being performed, It is desirable not to perform this for the notification process that indicates an abnormality. That is, it is possible to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent activity if the hall side confirms through the management computer whether or not such external output occurs frequently.

  Moreover, according to the illicit management by such symbols, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor and vibration sensor are advantageous in that they do not necessarily have to be provided. However, in order to confirm whether or not the person who played the game is malicious, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor and vibration sensor are further prepared, and the result of detection by the sensor is also compared to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent act It is more desirable to do.

  That is, in this case, the induction of the game ball to the V winning hole 1156 has occurred although the induction of the game ball to the V winning hole 1156 is not generated in the control concerning the progress of the game. When the control is confirmed in a controlled manner, the detection by the sensor will be confirmed. As a result, it is desirable that a notification process for notifying an abnormality that the above-mentioned fraudulent action has been made is also performed at the same time when the detection by the sensor is also performed. Alternatively, the detection signal from the sensor may be output to the outside, and the hole side may determine the presence or absence of the fraudulent action through the management computer.

  On the other hand, when realizing as display output in the effect display device 1115, for example, it is desirable to realize as various game histories shown below.

  That is, the type of the symbol determined above is to determine that the gaming ball is induced to the lost hole 1230c, and the game ball is placed in a specific area (V winning opening 1156) in the game according to the winning. Is not guided, a display image having the first identification mode is made to appear on the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the first identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until control concerning the game corresponding to the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, the type of the symbol determined above is to determine that the gaming ball is induced to the specific area (V winning opening 1156), and the specific area (the game corresponding to the winning) When the game ball is guided to the V winning hole 1156), the effect display device 1115 causes a display image having the second identification mode to appear. Then, the display image having the second identification mode is controlled to continuously appear as a history display until the control concerning the game corresponding to the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, although the type of the symbol determined above determines that the gaming ball is induced to the lost hole 1230c, a specific area (V winning opening 1156) in the game according to the winning of the winning When the game ball is induced to (when a situation of fraud concern occurs), the effect display device 1115 causes a display image having the third identification mode to appear. Then, the display image having the third identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until control concerning the game corresponding to the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, although the type of the symbol determined above determines that the gaming ball is induced to the specific area (V winning opening 1156), the specific area in the game according to the winning of the winning When the gaming ball is not induced to (V prize opening 1156), a display image having the fourth identification mode is made to appear in the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the fourth identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until control concerning the game corresponding to the winning is performed again.

  According to such a configuration, not only can the above-mentioned fraudulent activity be found out by the history display having four types of identification modes, but also a claim from the player side (for example, V winning opening due to defective launcher It is expected that the hall side will be able to cope with the game ball successfully in 1156, etc.).

  However, in order to be able to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent acts with more certainty on the hole side, the process of updating the number of times when the above-mentioned fraudulent concern situation occurs (process of counting the number of occurrence of the situation) More desirable to do.

  That is, in this case, the peripheral control unit 4140 performs processing (processing for updating) to count up (or count down) the counter value of a predetermined counter whenever the situation of the above-mentioned fraud concern occurs. Then, if control is performed to cause a change in the display mode or the color according to the third identification mode based on the counter value updated by such processing, such occurrence can be extremely rare. It will be possible to check how often (a number of times) an incident (a case of fraud concern) occurs, and this will allow the Hall side to find out the above-mentioned fraud with greater certainty It will be.

  Incidentally, in order to be able to confirm the number of times of occurrence of the above-mentioned fraudulent concern for a long time, the display image having the third identification mode is switched to the display image having another identification mode. Even if it becomes possible, it is desirable not to reset the counter value of the above-mentioned predetermined counter, and to hold this until the predetermined operation such as the RAM clear is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the big hit game according to the first special symbol side lottery is performed when in the normal gaming state, the time saving game state occurs, and at this time, the second advantageous in the short game state It is almost fixed that events such as being played will be played sequentially after the big hit game will be played again and the big hit game will be played again by the small hit being obtained, and so on. The game characteristics such as "can win" can be realized by the lottery of the second special symbol carried over at the time of the transition control from the state to the normal game state, but such a game property is realized Then, it becomes important to perform the processing on the normal symbol side so as to position the lottery of the second special symbol side as a relatively rare event. Hereinafter, the process on the normal symbol side will be described.

[About normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an example of the normal control process (step S15).

  If it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is on in the process of step S2001 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S2010, the main control MPU 4100a first executes gate part passage processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from a random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol storage area of the RAM 4100e.

  Then, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal pattern process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stop of fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2100)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing and the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the common pattern fluctuation random number is performed (step S2200)
3. Normal symbol variation processing that stands by until variation display of normal symbols in normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S2300)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is stopped the variation display of the normal symbol so that the normal symbol display 1189 is displayed Normal symbol stop processing (step S2400)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of variation control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, inside starting game territory 1100 making slide operation of starting opening door member 1214 to appearance position Normal electric combination product opening process (step S2500) that executes the process of forming the bridge passage that connects the flow-down path of the game ball and the second starting opening 1153 (island type winning opening)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S2010).

  If it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is on in the process of step S2001 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S2011, the main control MPU 4100a first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  When it is determined in the process of step S2011 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S2012 to S2014 is performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols into the state of suspension. It will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S2012, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S2013, the normal random number and the common-pattern variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S2014, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S2011 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S2012 to step S2014, the variation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2100).

  When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 145, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the normal hold number counter as the processing of step S2101. It is judged whether or not there is a variation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the processing of step S2102 next The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode is read from the same RAM 4100 e. Then, next, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out manner for the random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) relating to the above.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate 1134 in order from the first (first) area Do. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 1134, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in the order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first).

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short time gaming state (YES in step S2105), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a determination table (not shown) per time common time chart when time is short (step S2106) If the current gaming state is the non-time-short gaming state (normal gaming state) (NO in step S2105), the non-time-shortening popular drawing hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107), and the selected popular drawing The determination table is compared with the normal random number read out in step S2102 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2108).

  In addition, the common drawing hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is used when the playing state is non-short time, and the common time drawing determination table used when the gaming state is short And a determination table for non-time-to-time situations. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the determination table for per common drawing for reference to comparison with ordinary random numbers is a determination table for per common drawing when time is short and a determination table for per common drawing when non-short time In any of the above, it is consistent with the determination value per common drawing indicating that all 255 types of ordinary random numbers have won per common drawing, and does not coincide with any deviation judgment value representing the commonness deviation. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other. Therefore, when there is passage of the game ball to the gate section 1134, regardless of the game state, always win per winning map, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (island type Control is made to slide the starting opening door member 1214 to the emerging position so as to form a bridge passage connecting the winning opening).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second starting opening 1153 in the normal gaming state, while the first in the time-saving gaming state It is important to make it easy to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 1153 rather than the starting opening 1152, and it is possible for the probability of hitting the symbol normally among the configurations that can be realized. May be set as appropriate.

  Then, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the selected common drawing is to be per common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing per judgment table and the ordinary random number (step S2109), the variation is elected per common drawing. After setting the flag per common drawing indicating the symbol (step S2110), the common drawing per symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the normal design) at the time of variation control stop of the normal symbol (step S2112). On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected standard drawing is determined to be out of alignment as a result of comparison between the common drawing selection table and the normal random number, the common drawing as a mode (stopping pattern of the normal design) stops when the fluctuation control of the normal design is stopped. It determines (step S2111). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2200), this processing is ended (step S2113).

[About the operation mode of starting opening door member 1214 in the case where a hit is obtained in the normal gaming state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important that in the normal gaming state, the game ball can not be entered into the second starting opening 1153.

  And although this was also mentioned above, the 2nd starting opening 1153 concerning this embodiment is a detached island type winning opening provided at a position away from the flowing down path where the gaming ball can flow down in the gaming area 1100. It is provided. On the other hand, when it is possible to appear and recede by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100 and it is at the appearance position of the sunk position and the appearance position, the flow-down path and the second starting opening 1153 ( Served as a bridge passage connecting the remote island type winning opening), to the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening) located in the direction different from the depth direction (right direction) the gaming ball on the flow down path By providing the starting opening door member 1214 (tonboro type movable member) provided so as to roll, it is possible to strictly distinguish the operation which allows the bridging of the game ball and the operation which is not allowed to use it properly. It has been realized.

  In this respect, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when a hit is obtained in the normal gaming state, the flow path in the game area 1100 is used as the operation time of the start opening door member 1214. The time (for example, 0.088 seconds) shorter than the winning allowing threshold time which it takes from the start of rolling on the first guide portion 1214a to the third guide portion 1214c after the game I will always choose. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, every time a regular drawing hit is obtained, the inflow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (the remote winning opening) The bridge passage (the upper surface of the start opening door member 1214) connecting the two will appear. However, this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) will slide so as to always disappear and drop out the gaming ball before the gaming ball from the flow-down path crosses over.

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, the game ball is not accepted by the second starting opening 1153 by the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, but when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated A bridge passage is formed to connect the inflow path of the game ball in the area 1100 and the second starting opening 1153 (island type winning opening), and the game ball can roll on the bridge passage, The expectation of winning to the second starting opening 1153 is naturally enhanced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

[About the operation aspect of starting opening door member 1214 in the case where a common drawing hit is obtained in the short time game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 1153 in the time-saving game state.

  In this respect, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when a hit is obtained in the short time game state, the flow path in the game area 1100 is used as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. The time (for example, 1.5 seconds) longer than the winning allowing threshold time which it takes from the start of rolling on the first guide portion 1214a to the third guide portion 1214c after the game I will always choose. That is, in this case, even in the time-saving game state, each time a general drawing hit is obtained, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (island type winning opening) The bridge passage (the upper surface of the start opening door member 1214) connecting the two appears. However, in addition to this, if the right strike continues, at least one of the game balls from the flow-down path (here, the time at which at least two game balls break off for a firing interval of 0.6 seconds (1 (5 seconds)) crosses this bridge passage (the upper surface of the start opening door member 1214) and is received by the second start opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening) and disappears after the reception, and the above bridge The game balls in the passage (the upper surface of the start opening door member 1214) are slid so as to be dropped.

  According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, whenever the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed, the inflow path of the gaming ball in the gaming area 1100 and the second starting opening 1153 (a remote winning opening) Since the game ball having passed through the bridge passage to be connected is received by the second start port 1153, the game ball can easily enter the second start port 1153.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the stage where the retraction of the starting opening door member 1214 is started and the win to the second starting opening 1153 is changed to an undesirable situation, A system is constructed by a structure in which the speed toward the second starting opening 1153 is automatically braked by the frictional force corresponding to the contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Therefore, in addition to the control for the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, such an automatic braking system also increases the certainty for non-winning when performing an operation that does not allow the bridging of the game balls. Furthermore, even when a relatively long bridging passage is realized as the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting is started when the starting opening door member 1214 starts to move backward (displacement from the appearance position to the sunken position). It is possible to improve the immediacy until the ball 1153 can not actually enter the ball.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 is used as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 in the first guide portion 1214a. Only the time (unfavorable game mode) shorter than the winning possible threshold time required to reach the third guide portion 1214c after rolling is started can be selected. However, in the normal gaming state, the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 starts rolling at the first guide portion 1214 a as the operation time of the start opening door member 1214 before the third guide portion A time longer than the winning allowing threshold time required to reach 1214 c may be selected with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in this case, when in the normal gaming state, an advantageous game mode may appear in which random numbers (high probability start information) for the second special symbol can be put on hold up to a predetermined number, and the advantageous game The second special symbol lottery held on hold while being considered as an aspect (a game on the side where the probability of getting a hit to start a big hit game is increased) is over after the advantageous game aspect is over (prize is acceptable) After the operation by the start-up door member 1214 for a time longer than the threshold time, it is possible to be stored. And, as mentioned above, the probability that a big hit game can be generated (the probability that either a big hit or an advantageous small hit will be obtained) while the four second special symbol drawings in the pending state are being digested is 50 Since it is considered as a high probability of% or more, it is possible to enjoy such a high probability lottery game even in the normal gaming state.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, a process performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 146, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether a 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set at step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis process of step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1102, the control process related to the display effect of the effect display device 1115 is executed based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command and the like are acquired from the main control MPU 4100a.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 first of all the various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, based on the fluctuation pattern command, the effect table at the time of the big hit, and the big hit time (small Select one of the effect table and the winning table). In these effect tables, the contents of the display effects in the effect display device 1115 are stored in a form corresponding to the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol.

  Next, after selecting one of the above two effect tables, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects one of the display effects stored in the selected effect table based on the change pattern (change time) indicated by the change pattern command. One of the contents (display effect pattern) is selected.

  Then, after the content (display effect pattern) of the display effect is selected in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the symbol information command and the type thereof among various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the above, the process of determining the symbol combination of the decorative symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 1115 is performed.

  For example, when the content (display effect pattern) of the display effect is selected from the effect table at the time of winning the big hit, the big hit is won as a symbol combination of the above decorative symbol based on the type of the big hit indicated by the symbol information command. A special symbol combination (a symbol combination in which three decorative symbols of red or blue appear all in a row) is selected to indicate what has been done and its type. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since only one type of jackpot is prepared for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the type is indicated by the color of the decorative symbol. Absent.

  On the other hand, although you have been dropped for big hit, when you select the contents (display effect pattern) of the display effect from the effect table at the time of the big hit when you win the small hit, the small hit shown by the symbol information command Based on the type, as the symbol combination of the decorative symbols, a symbol combination at the time of a small hit where it is indicated that a small hit is won (a symbol combination appearing with a number not all three decorative symbols are selected) is selected. However, when the type of small hit is a specific type (poor small hit) disadvantageous to the player, a display mode such as a predetermined chance eye (pattern combination in which all three decorative symbols appear together in numbers) You may make it appear a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, when you reach a loss during the big hit defeat and select the content (display effect pattern) of the display effect from the effect table at the big hit, select a special symbol combination as a symbol combination of the above decorative symbols. Selects the symbol combination at the time of different reach loss (symbol combination which appears in (identical) numbers in which only two decorative symbols in a specific row are aligned). In addition, at the time of losing, when selecting the contents (display effect pattern) of the display effect from the effect table at the time of the big hit loss, as the symbol combination of the above decorative symbols, the symbol at the time of drop different from the special symbol combination Select a combination (a symbol combination that appears with a number that does not match all three decorative symbols).

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on various commands (small hit start command, big hit start command, etc.) related to control of a hit game (small hit game, big hit game) among various information obtained from the main control MPU 4100a. Then, one of the effect table for the small hit game and the effect table for the big hit game is selected. In these effect tables, the content (display effect pattern) of the display effect in the effect display device 1115 is stored in a form in which the small hit game and the big hit game scene (progress) are associated with each other. Next, after the peripheral control unit 4140 selects one of the above two effect tables, the display effect stored in the selected effect table is selected based on the progress of the hit game (small hit game, big hit game) One of the contents (display effect pattern) is selected.

  In addition, although it will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment performs control to cause advance effect at a predetermined timing of the game in which it is possible to grasp the hit of the big hit lottery being put on hold. There is.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a variation pattern prior determination command related to control of a leading effect (advanced attraction effect etc.) to be described later among various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, a command for type precedent determination, and hold If you obtain a command at the time of advance judgment such as a command at the time of advance judgment, the number of pending (value of the number of pending counter) and the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special) indicated by the pending advance decision command among the commands The above-acquired command at the time of the preceding decision acquired (command at the time of variation pattern precedent judgment) in the storage area (sub side first special symbol hold storage area of the peripheral control unit 4140, second side second special symbol hold storage area) A process is performed to store information indicated by the type advance determination command and the hold advance determination command).

  More specifically, the sub side special symbol hold storage area (sub side first special symbol hold storage area, sub side second special symbol hold storage area) has four storage areas of 1 to 4 and the above main control The information indicated by the preceding judgment command (the fluctuation pattern leading judgment command, the type leading judgment command, and the hold leading judgment command) indicating each result in the preceding judgment processing on the MPU 4100a side is the first (first) Store sequentially from the area. Then, if the information indicated by the preceding determination command is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and acquiring the preceding determination command, the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage is performed Information is stored in the area indicated by the acquired prior determination command. When the start condition of the variable display based on the preceding determination command stored in the first storage area is satisfied, the information indicated by the preceding determination command stored in the first storage area is read out and the nth The information stored in the storage area (n = 2 to 4) is moved to the n-1st (n = 2 to 4) storage area (shift process). Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) has occurred is stored so as to be identifiable.

  Then, based on various commands (such as a variation pattern command and a big hit start command) from the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4140a leads according to the information indicated by the preceding judgment command stored at that time. It will be directing.

  Although described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is in a state of suspension at that time when various commands (such as a big hit start command) related to control of a big hit game are obtained from the main control MPU 4100 a. The content (display effect pattern) of the advance effect to be described later is selected using all the judgment results obtained separately for the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs, to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the information related to the content of the display effect selected as described above as the display command. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates information (commands) generated in response to the content (display effect pattern) of the display effect being selected, the lamp drive substrate 3041, the motor drive substrate 3045, and the sound source IC 4140c. Output as appropriate.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S 1103, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S1104, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3041 is executed. In the random number update process of step S1106, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

  The process of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms steady process has started (the command from step S1101) Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1102 after the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the 16 ms steady processing To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[Playability of pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment]
FIG. 148 is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment advances the game based on the above-mentioned novel game characteristics, and the flow of the rendering according to it It is a chart. Hereinafter, various processes when the game is advanced in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be summarized.

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 is the first guide portion 1214a as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. Only the time shorter than the winning allowing threshold time required to reach the third guide portion 1214c after the start of the rolling at the time t. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shoot the ball at the left side of the center character 2500, which is the side on which the first starting opening 1152 is provided, not the second starting opening 1153. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 starts rolling in the first guide portion 1214 a as the operation time of the start opening door member 1214. Only a time longer than the winning possible threshold time required to reach the third guiding portion 1214c may be selected. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (to hit the right) aiming at the right side of the center character 2500, which is the side on which the second starting opening 1153 is provided.

  In such a game condition, if it is controlled to be in the normal game state, the player performs a game in which the player strikes the left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening 1152. It will be done. As a result, every time the game ball enters the first starting opening 1152, the first special symbol lottery is put on hold until the predetermined upper limit (4 here). Then, the first special symbol lottery that has been put on hold in this way is digested according to the order held when the first special symbol side start condition is satisfied (FIG. 134: YES in step S302), The first special symbol lottery will be performed under the conditions shown in 141.

  However, as shown in FIG. 141, the result of the first special symbol lottery includes "big hit" and "preferred small hit (first small hit)" as a hit (winning) for generating a big hit game. However, the probability of getting a big hit is a low probability such as "1/400", and the probability of getting an advantageous small hit (multiplied value of the small hitting probability and the probability that an advantageous small hitting is selected in type judgment) There is an extremely low probability such as "1/8571".

  Therefore, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, basically, a "dropout" that does not correspond to either "big hit" or "favorable small hit" is obtained, and based on the result of the "drop". Control is performed such that the first special symbol is changed only by the determined fluctuation time, and a stop symbol corresponding to "dropout" appears when the fluctuation time elapses. However, as the type of such "dropout", in addition to a loss, since a disadvantage small hit is obtained with the probability of "1/175", a stop symbol corresponding to "dropout" appears. After having made it, the control concerning execution of the small hit game at the time of an adverse small hit may be performed further.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "favorable small hit" is obtained, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) It is possible to start the big hit game as long as the game is continued (right-handed game is continued) so that the state in which the ball is present (waiting for winning state) is maintained, whereas "unfavorable small hit" If the game ball is won in the prize winning opening 1155 if the prize is obtained, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 prevents the none of the gaming balls from being distributed to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156. The opening and closing operation is as described above.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, when the second disadvantageous small hit of the disadvantageous small hits is obtained, it is an advantageous small hit until the middle stage within the period when the small hitting game is performed (first advantageous small hit Control is performed to operate the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the same manner as or in the same manner as in the case of obtaining the). Further, at this time, an expectation effect may be performed to make it possible to be aware of the possibility that the advantageous small hit is obtained also in the effect display device 1115.

  Then, if such a game is repeatedly performed and a big hit (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, then the variation pattern at the big hit is determined (FIG. 128: step S 402 a) After the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation timer (FIG. 128: step S410), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 148A, when the timing t11 when the fluctuation timer times up comes, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is ended by making the stop symbol at the time of big hit appear. After the jackpot stop symbol has appeared, an interval period before the start of the big hit game is generated, and execution of the big hit game is started based on the passage of the interval period before the start of the big hit game.

  In the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, only the 15R time shorts are obtained as the type of big hit, so the above-mentioned round game is repeated 15 times When it is hit, the big hit game is over. After that, the big hit game ending interval is generated, and when the big hit game ending interval period has elapsed, transition control to the short time gaming state is performed by operating the time saving function (timing t12).

  However, as described above, when a big hit game according to the second special symbol side lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) is played, it is possible to obtain approximately 2000 game balls If a big hit game according to the first special symbol side lottery result (first big hit, first small win) is played, it is possible to obtain only about 400 game balls in a relatively short period At the end of the big hit game, transition control to the short game state will be performed.

  Although this is also mentioned above, in the first special symbol lottery, it is rare that the first advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery. However, even if you generate a big hit game (based on the acceptance of the game ball in the V winning opening 1156) through the small hit game according to the winning of the first advantageous small hit, the first advantageous small hit is similarly obtained Regardless of the playing state of the game, transition control to the time saving game state is performed by operating the time saving function when the end interval period of the big hit game has passed (timing t12).

  However, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes, as one of the purposes, a game in which a player can obtain an award as a set of big hit games (two big hit games). In particular, it is possible to pay out such a large number of prizes, not only to increase the number of prizes that can be acquired by one game to twice as much as before (up to 4,000 pieces). A set of big hit games (two big hit games) may have loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate such as over 50%.

  Therefore, in the short game state according to this embodiment, by making the second starting port 1153 play a game in which the game ball is inserted (right-handed), as shown in FIG. 141, the big hit game is started. Among the hits (big hit, second advantageous small hit), the lottery under the probability that the second advantageous small hit is obtained with a high probability of 1/6, in particular, causes the jackpot game to be started in the first special symbol lottery The second special symbol lottery) having a high probability of more than 10 times the probability that the big hit, the second advantageous small hit) is obtained is performed. When both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery have a reserve, it is as described above that the second special symbol lottery is digested first regardless of the reserve order.

  That is, in this case, the probability that the probability of getting a big hit game to start (big hit, second advantageous small hit) exceeds 50%, only if the second special symbol lottery is digested by the upper limit reserve number (4 times) Therefore, the second advantageous small hit is obtained at relatively early timing t13 by being controlled to shift to the short game state, and the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol that has been digested is predetermined upper limit value (100 It is considered as an almost impossible game condition that the short game state is ended by reaching the times). And, through the small hit game according to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156), the second stage (second half) of one set of big hit games After the jackpot game is generated (timing t14), the normal gaming state is returned (timing t15).

  In addition, as a result of the second special symbol lottery being digested in the short time game state, as a hit to start the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit), it is rare, but similarly generates a big hit game when winning a big hit After having been made (timing t14), transition control to the normal gaming state is performed (timing t15).

  According to the game control in such a short time game state, from the sense of the player side, it is controlled to transition to the big hit game (first stage big hit game) at the time of winning in the normal game state and the short time game state Two jackpot games with the jackpot game (second stage jackpot game) expected to be obtained immediately are offered as a set of jackpot games. However, here the big hit game of the first step is the one according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, and only 400 game balls can be obtained, so the big hit game for 2 times Thus, 2400 game balls can be obtained.

  And, at timing t15 after the set of big hit games (two big hit games) is thus provided, the normal gaming state is returned, but in the normal gaming state, the on hold state is when in the time saving state It is made possible to digest the second special symbol lottery that was made. That is, even in the normal gaming state, the game (second special symbol lottery) on the side where the probability of getting the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game is dramatically increased It has become possible to digest only a few minutes, and wins a jackpot game start (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start a big hit game until the end of the pending number of minutes is saved to the short time game state again It is possible to provide novel playability such as whether it is possible to be transition-controlled (does it possible to restart one set of big hit games (two big hit games)).

  By the way, even in the normal gaming state, the game (second special symbol lottery) on the side where the probability of getting the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game is dramatically increased A period in which it is possible to digest for several minutes (for example, a period from timing t15 until all second special symbol lottery for a few minutes have been digested as a loss, or four second which are already in a pending state In the period until the big hit game is started (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained while the special symbol lottery is being digested, it is necessary to further boost such innovative game characteristics as a stage It is desirable from the viewpoint of improving the amusement of the game to make it appear for a relatively long period of time the appearances of the second special symbol lottery that require a drop.

  However, on the other hand, in the case where the rendition is made to appear for such a relatively long time, speedy game progress (digestion of symbol variation) is in spite of being in the gaming situation in which the so-called pending inner row is obtained. It becomes difficult to be done, and there is a concern about the decline in game entertainment.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to further boost such novel playability as an effect, an effect according to the falling of the second special symbol lottery is made to appear for a relatively long time. It is decided to perform special control that can be realized in combination with speedy game progress (digestion of symbol variation) when the so-called on-the-go reservation is obtained.

  That is, although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, from the period when the big hit game is played, the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) under conditions more advantageous than the normal conditions When transition control is made to a period in which it is possible to digest only a few holdings, the drop is made without having a relationship with the fluctuation time of the symbol according to the result of the big hit drawing in the holding state. The effect pattern to be grasped is determined, and control to cause the determined effect pattern to appear within the period in which the big hit game is performed (control relating to the forward effect). Then, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to start the symbol fluctuation about the big hit lottery which is on hold status while the hit is already shown by the effect pattern in the period when the big hit game is performed There is.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes possible to start the symbol variation about the big hit lottery while the drop is already shown, even if the role of "showing the drop" is eliminated from the symbol variation. The problem does not easily occur, and the bold setting of the time of the symbol variation itself can be made possible without any adverse effect on the presentation.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to digest the jackpot lottery (second special symbol lottery) under conditions that are more advantageous than the ordinary conditions by the number of reservations. During the period, when the second special symbol lottery is digested, regardless of the drop, the ultra-shortened time (0.099 seconds shorter than any other fluctuation time in this embodiment) as the fluctuation time. It is made to select the fluctuation pattern of the defined ultrashortening fluctuation by all means.

  Therefore, it has become possible to suitably realize both of "performing a sudden drop effect for a relatively long time" and "speedy game progress", which has conventionally been in a trade-off relationship. Deterioration of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, in such a configuration, in fact, until the end of the digestion of the second special symbol lottery of novel game characteristics (the number of pending minutes) that appear within the pullback period (such as timing t15 to t16) after the big hit game is over During the start of the big hit game in the middle (big hit, second advantageous small hit) won the big hit game state (or, can be controlled to transition again to the short time game state after that) can be a big hit It can be made to appear within the execution period of the game.

  Moreover, with regard to the game within the pullback period (such as timing t15 to t16) after the big hit game is over (pattern change that has lost the role of "showing a drop"), combined with the configuration of the above-mentioned ultra-shortened change The game / representation comes to be realized as if the character was practically eliminated.

  Therefore, if there is one that has been elected to start the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) in the second special symbol lottery that is in the pending state, from the player side, symbol variation is You will receive an impression as if the game (playing state in which the big winning opening is opened) that is made possible to obtain a large number of prizes without being performed is being continued, and this will It will be improved.

  On the other hand, even if there is nothing that has been elected to start the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) in the second special symbol lottery in the pending state, a large amount by the big hit game In such a state that it is possible to obtain an award, it will be understood that such an advantageous gaming state (a gaming state in which a big winning opening is opened) will not be continued, so that the game entertaining ability is reduced. Can be suppressed. That is, although it is controlled to the chance gaming state such as whether it is possible to shift control to the big hit gaming state (or later time short gaming state) again, nothing is obtained as a result of the game If there is such a thing, there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced, but such a concern comes to be solved suitably.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, it may be controlled to the time saving game state instead of the normal gaming state as such a withdrawal period after the big hit game is over (For example, timing t18 to t19 and the like). And, on giving an impression as if a game in which a large number of prizes can be obtained (a game state in which a big winning opening is opened) can be continued further while symbol variation is not performed, It is needless to say that various characteristic configurations are required to be used even in such a time-saving gaming state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery has its upper limit pending number, even in the time-saving game state, while the effect image that appears when the big hit game is played appears as it is Select the fluctuation pattern of the ultrashortening fluctuation that defines the ultrashortening time (in this embodiment, 0.099 seconds shorter than any other fluctuation time) as their fluctuation time while being digested by (four times) minutes Will be

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the start door is open until at least the upper limit number of holdings (four times) of the symbol variation is absorbed in the short game state immediately after the big hit game is over. By performing control such that the expected value of the number of operations of the member 1214 is less than "1", the operation mode of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function (it is difficult to appear in the period when the big hit game is played) This makes it difficult for the player to know that the big hit game has ended since it is difficult for the operation mode to appear.

  It should be noted that the expected value of the number of times the starting door member 1214 is operated is less than "1" while symbol variation of the holding upper limit number (4 times) is absorbed in the short game state immediately after the big hit game is over. For control, the probability that the game ball will be accepted by the gate member 1134, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the probability of winning normally), the variation time of the normal symbol when the time saving function is not operating, the variation display of the normal symbol It can be realized through setting of various parameters such as the waiting time from the end to the start of the operation of the start opening door member 1214, the fluctuation pattern (time) of ultrashortening fluctuation, and so on. However, in order to preferably realize such control, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the state where the time saving function is not operating, until the symbol fluctuation for the upper limit number of holdings (for 4 times) is absorbed in the time saving gaming state To be set longer than half the length of time (more preferably, the time until the pattern variation of the upper limit of several minutes (4 times) is digested in the short game state is digested) It is desirable to make it difficult to give lottery symbols of regular symbols within time.

  According to these configurations, even in the case of being controlled to the short game state, the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the hold state is won If there is a game, it seems as if a game where a large number of awards can be obtained (a game state in which a big winning opening is opened) is performed continuously while symbol fluctuation is not performed. You will be able to give an impression.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific effect image appearing during the period when the big hit game is executed is continuously displayed as it is during the time-controlled game mode So, even if there is nothing in the second special symbol lottery that has been put on hold to win the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit), there is no big win It is difficult for the player to grasp that the game is over.

  However, if emphasis is placed on making it difficult to notice that the big hit game has already been interrupted, the big hit lottery hold function, which is required as a function when in the short game state, will be loose.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the jackpot is won if the jackpot is won while the symbol variation of the upper limit number of holdings (4 times) is digested in the short game state immediately after the big hit game is over. By performing control such that the expected value of the number of times the start door member 1214 is operated is “1” or more within the symbol variation according to the winning, the second special symbol lottery suspension opportunity is provided to further the big hit game To make it possible to

  It should be noted that the expected value of the number of times the starting door member 1214 is operated is "1" or more before symbol fluctuation of the upper limit number of holdings (4 times) is absorbed in the short time gaming state immediately after the big hit game is over. As for the control to be performed, the probability that the game ball is accepted by the gate member 1134, the hit probability of the normal symbol (the winning probability of the normal hit), and the time saving function is not operating as in the control to make less than “1” described above. It can be realized through the setting of various parameters such as normal symbol fluctuation time, waiting time from the end of fluctuation display of normal symbol to start of operation of starting opening door member 1214, fluctuation pattern (time) of super shortening fluctuation, etc. It is

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when generating a big hit game (first step big hit game) as a result of the lottery in the normal game state, the type of the hit (big hit, small The jackpot game (first stage jackpot game) to start one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) regardless of the type of hit or special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) After that the time-saving game state must be generated.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the four second specials already in hold status in the normal gaming state returned after the above-described one set of big hit games (two big hit games) are provided. The probability of winning the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while the symbol lottery is being digested is “671/1296” (= 1− even if the probability of winning the big hit is excluded. (5/6) 4), which allows the above-mentioned set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) to be loopable with a probability of 50% or more (basically, an advantageous state continues) Performance)).

  Then, in the normal gaming state as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while 4 second special symbol lottery already in the pending state is being digested, was elected to the second advantageous small hit In the case (timing t16), through the small hit game according to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156), the big hit game (first step big hit game) Is generated (timing t17), control is shifted to the time saving game state (timing t18).

  In addition, as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while four second special symbol lottery that is already on hold status in the normal gaming state is being digested, it was rare but was elected to the big hit Also in the case, after generating the big hit game (first step big hit game) (timing t17), transition control to the time saving game state will be controlled (timing t18).

  And, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, a second advantageous small hit is usually obtained at a relatively early timing t19. Then, after generating a big hit game (second big hit game) through a small hit game according to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the game ball being accepted in the V winning opening 1156) (Timing t20) The normal gaming state is returned (Timing t21).

  In addition, as a result of the second special symbol lottery being digested in the short time game state, as a hit to start the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit), it is rare, but also when you win the big hit, the big hit game (2 After generating the jackpot of the stage (timing t20), transition control to the normal gaming state is performed (timing t21).

  And, as mentioned above, after two big hit games have been offered as one set of big hit games in this way, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol lottery that was put on hold when in the time-saving game state is sequentially digested By doing this, it is possible to be controlled to shift to the short game state again by winning the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game until the end of the digestion for a few minutes of the hold It will provide novel playability such as whether it is possible to start one set of big hit games (two big hit games) again.

  According to the control (timing t16 to t22) for such a set of big hit games (two big hits games), not only the second stage big hit game (timing t20 to t21) but also the first stage big hit game (Timing t17 to t18) can also be performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in any big hit game, an award that can be obtained for 2000 game balls will be awarded, and this makes it possible to twice as much as 4000 through the set of big hit games (two big hit games). Each game ball can be made obtainable.

  Then, after one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is started, each time the normal gaming state is returned, the big hit is made while the four second special symbol lotterys that are already on hold are being digested As long as a hit (a big hit, a second advantageous small hit) to start the game is obtained (timing t22), a set of big hit games (two big hit games) can be repeatedly used to obtain 4000 game balls. It becomes possible to be granted.

  For example, when a second advantageous small hit is obtained as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game as a result of sequentially digesting the second special symbol lottery in the pending state at timing t22, the second By generating a big hit game (first stage big hit game) (at timing t23), through a small hit game according to the win of two advantageous small hits (based on the fact that the game ball has been accepted to the V winning opening 1156). First, 2000 game balls can be obtained.

  In this way, when 2000 game balls can be obtained, transition control to the short game state will be controlled (timing t24), but at this time in the short game state, the big hit game at an early stage without reducing the balls almost at all It is considered as a game condition in which a hit (a big hit, a second advantageous small hit) to start the game can be obtained again. Therefore, assuming that the second advantageous small hit is obtained at relatively early timing t25 after being controlled to shift to the short time gaming state, the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (V in game opening 1156 By generating a jackpot game (second jackpot game) (at timing t26), it becomes possible to acquire another 2,000 game balls.

  And, as mentioned above, after two big hit games have been offered as one set of big hit games in this way, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol lottery that was put on hold when in the time-saving game state is sequentially digested By doing this, it is possible to be controlled to shift to the short game state again by winning the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game until the end of the digestion for a few minutes of the hold It will provide novel playability such as whether it is possible to start one set of big hit games (two big hit games) again.

  However, despite the fact that such a game feature is provided, although the second special symbol lottery that has been put on hold when in the short game state is sequentially digested (timing t27 to t28), the big hit game If the player does not win the hit to be started (big hit, second advantageous small hit) (timing t 28), the player can not hold the second special symbol lottery anew while the player is in the normal game state. , A left strike, and it will be redone from the game which makes the said 1st starting opening 1152 enter a game ball (a normal time game).

  According to such game control, two jackpot games will be played as one set of jackpot games, as long as the player can win a jackpot game (big hit, advantageous small hit) when the player is in the normal game state. It will be. Then, whenever one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is finished, the game is temporarily returned to the normal gaming state, and one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is generated again with 50% or more success probability. A loop challenge game (up to four second special symbol lotterys that are already on hold) will be performed as to whether it is possible to let them go. In addition, although it is returned to the normal gaming state during the period in which the loop challenge game is performed, it is confirmed that the left up, etc. just by confirming that the up to four second special symbol lotterys which are already on hold are being digested. Will not be played. And as long as it succeeds in generating one set of big hit games (two big hits games) every time such a loop challenge game is awarded, one set of big hit games (two big hits games) is taken as one unit. While the special game state being executed is repeatedly executed, when failing to generate one set of big hit games (two big hit games), it will be possible to redo from the game under normal game conditions And novel playability comes to be realized.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, the effects according to the flow of the game when the game is advanced based on such novel game characteristics are realized as follows. There is.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), first, a game with one set of big hit games as a unit before the transition to a special game state that can loop with a probability of 50% or more, a disadvantageous game As described above, when in the state, the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly performed under the game conditions shown in FIG. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, first, also in the effect display device 1115, control is performed so that the symbol variation effect (variation in lost) according to the result of the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly appeared.

  However, while such symbol variation effects (loss variation) are repeated, it is rare that the symbol at the time of an adverse small hit may stop. And as mentioned above, when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained among the disadvantage small hits, it is the same as the case where the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained until the middle stage in the small hit game, or Since the control to operate the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the similar open mode is performed, the expectation display capable of making it possible to be aware of the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained also in the effect display device 1115 appears To be controlled.

  In such an expected effect, as described above, the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 operates a plurality of times in the middle stage, and whenever there is the action, the game ball is in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 It is made to enter. That is, in this case, improvement of the game interest by the machine lottery with a high probability such as 1/6 as a simple setting probability such as whether or not the game ball having entered the internal area is accepted by the V winning opening 1156 You will be able to expect.

  In addition, although it is extremely rare as a result of the first special symbol lottery, even when the first advantageous small hit (1/8571) is obtained, the effect display device as in the case where the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained. In 1115, control is performed so that an expectation effect that can be made aware of the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained appears. However, after timing t8 shown in FIG. 142, it is possible to recognize that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by causing the effect image different from the case where the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained to appear. It will be.

  And, when a big hit (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery as a result of repeated playing of such a game, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the fluctuation at the time of big hit acquired from the main control MPU 4100a A presentation pattern according to the pattern is selected, and control is made to appear as a fluctuation presentation up to the timing t11.

  Then, when the stop symbol at the big hit (stop symbol for starting the big hit game) appears at timing t11, it is assumed that the first special game state (one set of big hit games (two big hit games)) is started. First, the first half of the first stage big hit game and the second stage big hit game (first stage big hit game) is shown that it is in the situation where it is being played, a large amount of awards The first bonus effect is displayed, which indicates that the player has entered a special game state (first special game state) in which it is possible to obtain an.

  As a result, when the first stage big hit game ends at timing t12, the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (while being controlled to the time saving game state prior to the start of the second stage big hit game) A loop challenge preparation effect is performed to increase the probability that the two big hit games are continued to a probability value of 50% or more.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has the capability to loop the above-described one set of big hit games (two big hit games) with a probability of 50% or more. The second special symbol lottery (the lottery with the highest probability of hitting a big hit game being obtained with high probability) while the time saving function is activated, before being returned to the normal gaming state, with the upper limit pending number It is realized by putting up to four certain statuses.

  For example, if it is returned to the normal gaming state in a state in which there are only three pending numbers of the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is started while the second special symbol lottery in the three pending states is being digested The probability of winning in (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is approximately “91/216” (= 1− (5/6) 3), ignoring the big hit probability as an error, and one set described above The big hit game of (2 big hit games), you can only loop with a probability of less than 50%.

  Therefore, in the loop challenge preparation effect, first, when the timing t12 arrives, a right-handed effect display is made to aim for winning in the second starting opening 1153, and a winning in the second starting opening 1153 is made. Every time the second special symbol lottery is performed, the decorative symbols (three decorative symbol rows) are variably displayed. And, unless a hit to start the big hit game is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, it is made to make a lost symbol (a symbol display which is not a match of three) shown to be a failure at the time of the symbol stop .

  However, since the second advantageous small hit is obtained at an early stage as a hit to start the big hit game in the second special symbol lottery, it is usually shown that it is won when the symbol is stopped. Design display will be made to appear. In addition, after the effect image (for example, symbol display of 3 sets of matches) appeared that it was won in the small hit appears, the interval period before the start of the small hit game occurs, and the interval before the start of the small hit game As described above, the execution of the small hit game is started based on the lapse of a period.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, in the case of the effect display device 1115, when the effect image (for example, the symbol display of all three matches) appears that the small hit is won in the short time game state, the small hit game By making the effect display (preparation effect) to aim at winning a prize to the prize winning opening 1155 to be released, it is often made to not miss a winning opportunity to the prize winning opening 1155 The

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, when an effect image (for example, a symbol display of three sets of symbols) appears which indicates that the player has won the small hit in the short time gaming state first Instead of the prize winning opening 1155 to be opened, an effect indication to aim for a winning to the second starting opening 1153 is made to appear.

  That is, at this time, it can be said that the effect image indicating that the small hit has been won is attributable to the result of the lottery obtained by the second special symbol lottery in the pending state being digested. , The number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is likely to have not reached at least the upper limit (four) (a possibility of being less than the upper limit by one at most). On the other hand, in the small hit game, as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the condition device does not operate, so unlike the big hit game (FIGS. 139 and 140), the operation of the time-saving function is different. There is no way to start or stop the

  Therefore, when the effect image indicating that the small hit has been won appears, first, if the effect display to aim for winning in the second starting opening 1153 is made to appear, then the player is hit by the right. To be done. And, in the game ball hit in this way, the time saving function is activated during the time until the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the small hit game (during the interval period before the start of the small hit game) The second start opening 1153 can be received with high probability through the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) which is in the closed state.

  As a result, the small hit game can be started after the second special symbol lottery is put on hold to its upper limit hold number of four (timing t13), and thus the second step of the big hit game can be started Because of that (timing t14), when the second stage big hit game ends and is returned to normal game state (timing t15), such special game state (one set of big hit games (two big hit games)) Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation where it is possible to loop only with a probability of less than 50%. In this sense, when the effect image (for example, the display of all three symbols) appears that the small hit is won in the short time game state, the effect display indicating that the second start opening 1153 should be aimed at winning It can be said that the effect is that the set value for the loop probability concerning the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is determined by the result of the game by the player.

  In addition, in such a configuration, the time-short game state is not ended (the time-shortening function is not ended) between the appearance of the symbol that can start the big hit game and the occurrence of the big hit game. The time required for the reserve effect is additionally provided while continuing (1) (the interval before the start of the small hit game, the execution period of the small hit game). Therefore, the above lottery (second special symbol lottery by the production control and game control with time affordability, without affecting the effects until appearance of the symbol which can start the big hit game, the big hit game etc. It is possible to create a reserve rendition period that can be put on hold anew).

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, while being controlled to the time saving game state (while the time saving function is continued), the acceptance of the game ball to the second start opening 1153 is promoted to draw the lottery (second special symbol Whether or not to generate a bonus game state (big hit game) in which a bonus is given to the player upon receiving a game preparation period in which the lottery is newly put on hold and the result of the game in the game preparation period. A special branch period in which a game (small hit game) in which the player can select one is selected is created.

  That is, in this case, in the game preparation period, when the big hit game is over, it becomes possible to perform the game preparation for making the number of reservations reach the upper limit value, but the player can After confirming that there is no shortage in such game preparation (the number of reservations having reached the upper limit), it is possible to make the game progress so that the big hit game is generated as it is. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the game preparation is insufficient (the number of reservations has not reached the upper limit), the game ball should not be won when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the small hit game. Then, it becomes possible to make the game progress so as to obtain a chance of reworking of the game preparation without generating a big hit game. As a result, regardless of the status of the game in the game preparation period, it is possible to generate a big hit game only when the game preparation is done, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the fun of the game.

  Note that the effect image indicating that the small hit is won may not necessarily be the symbol display of three matches, and may appear, for example, in the middle of the variation of the decorative symbol. That is, in this case, since it is possible to urge to win the second starting opening 1153 from the middle of the fluctuation of the symbol, a time margin is created, and the second special symbol lottery is the upper limit pending number It will be more reliably avoided that a small hit game starts or a second stage big hit game starts while it can not be put on hold up to four.

  Thus, with the loop challenge preparation effect according to this embodiment, even when the big hit game is started, it has not yet been committed (the second advantageous small hit has been obtained, but the V winning opening 1156 In addition to the fact that the game ball is not accepted, the big hit game is supposed to occur if the big hit game is temporarily generated from the small hit game even when the feature winning opening 1155 is not yet opened). The player is urged to make a predetermined preparation so as not to obtain the game, and it can be said that the above-described novel game characteristics are realized.

  Moreover, according to such a loop challenge preparation effect, prior to the small hit game being started, the game ball of the game ball is passed through the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. I am trying to make it launch. Therefore, the game balls to be in the waiting for prize state will continue to exist naturally on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) in the closed state, and when the small hit game is started by this, the prize is already won It becomes possible to make the game ball in the waiting state enter into the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the interval period before the start of the small hit game, the effect to promote the winning of the second starting opening 1153 is performed, but instead, in the small hit A period may be provided in which the second start port 1153 is encouraged to be awarded during the variation time of the decorative symbol according to the winning, or the variation time and the interval period before the start may be divided. A period may be provided in which the second start port 1153 is urged to win a prize.

  In the loop challenge preparation effect, after performing an effect display prompting a winning to the second starting opening 1153, prior to the start of the small hit game, it is urged to win a prize to the prize winning opening 1155 An effect display may be further performed.

  Then, after such loop challenge preparation effect is performed, the second half of the first stage big hit game and the second stage big hit game (second stage big hit game) is performed at timing t14. Appear in the second half of the bonus presentation is shown to be in the situation.

  However, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes, as one of the purposes, a game in which a player can obtain an award as a set of big hit games (two big hit games). In particular, it is possible to pay out such a large number of prizes, not only to increase the number of prizes that can be acquired by one game to twice as much as before (up to 4,000 pieces). A set of big hit games (two big hit games) may have loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate such as over 50%.

  And, in order to realize such a set of big hit games (two big hit games), a game (lottery game) is played mainly with a lottery (second special symbol lottery) when in a time saving game state In particular, it is important for the player not to notice. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can stay in the time-saving game state by setting the probability of getting a hit that can start a big hit game to be 10 times higher than usual. We try to reduce the time (the number of times the lottery is made), but this alone has not led to the solution of the problem.

  Therefore, although it will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the game during the time-saving game state is a period (timing t11 to t15) from the first stage big hit game until the second stage big hit game is ended. In addition, including the execution period of (timing t12 to t14), a special prize presentation is made to be performed as one special prize period. Furthermore, a game or effect that can be looped with a probability of 50% or more, such as how many times a special award period (special award direction) in which such a large number of awards can be obtained can be looped as a gaming unit By providing the service, such a special award period (special award direction) can be enjoyed as a gaming unit similar to a conventional one-time big hit game. As a result, one set of big hit games (two big hits games) can be suitably realized, and the upper limit of the prize that can be obtained by the player during the special prize period (special prize presentation) per one game. You will be able to win a huge prize that will surpass the value.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as one of its purposes, within the pullback period (timing t15 to t16) after the big hit game (here, more accurately, one set of big hit games) is finished. And, the game and effect that should originally appear at timings t21 to t22 etc.) is advanced within the execution period of the big hit game (here, more precisely, one set of big hit games) before the withdrawal period. By making it appear in the form, the game and rendition within the pullback period (timing t15 to t16, timing t21 to t22, etc.) is substantially eliminated, and symbol variation is not performed. Providing gaming / representation as if the game where it is possible to obtain a large amount of awards as it is (the gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened) continues to be performed There is Rukoto.

  Therefore, although it will be described later, in the periphery control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, there is a special award period in which the above one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is played, and at least a second stage big hit game is played When you are in the period of the above loop challenge preparation effect (period of operating the short function) etc. Hit to start the big hit game in up to four second special symbol lottery put on hold status (big hit, second advantage) Perform a loop challenge effect as a dropout effect, such as whether or not there is a win in the small hit) (whether one set of big hit games (two big hit games) can be started again) or not I have to.

  However, as described above, such a loop challenge effect is originally within the pullback period (timing t15 to t16, timing t21 to t22, etc. after the above-described one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is over. In the above, a maximum of four second special symbol lotterys in the pending state are allowed to appear as a display effect pattern according to the result of the digestion while being sequentially digested.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a small hit obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery as a processing structure on the main control board 4100 side (a loop performance of 50% or more as described above is realized) In the case of a hit, it has a processing structure (FIG. 141) or the like which is determined only as an advantageous small hit (second advantageous small hit) whose type is a hit for starting a big hit game. Then, on this side, as a processing structure on the peripheral control board 4010 side, a maximum of four second specials which are put on hold in the period of the loop challenge preparation effect etc. It has a processing structure or the like that makes it possible to grasp in advance whether or not a big or small hit is obtained in the symbol lottery.

  According to such a configuration, even if the peripheral control board 4010 can not acquire the information indicating the type of the small hit, it is possible to grasp that the small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if it is possible, the hit effect (loop challenge effect) about the hit that generates the big hit game including the small hit that has produced a high continuity rate of over 50%. The second special symbol lottery will be able to be executed in the form of advancing ahead while being put on hold (advance effect).

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 4010 according to this embodiment indicates that there has been a big hit start command (or the V winning opening 1156 from the main control MPU 4100a) when in the time saving game state. If there is a transmission of V prize command), it will be displayed whether the information shown by the command at the time of advance judgment (up to 4 second special symbol lotterys in the hold state have hit winning to start the big hit game etc.) Processing of obtaining one of the plurality of display effect patterns based on the acquired information) (setting processing according to the display effect pattern) I do.

  Here, with this display effect pattern, the contents of the effect are developed based on a command from the main control MPU 4100a, such as when 15 round games in the big hit game are advanced, and such an effect of the development Among them, the result is shown whether the second special symbol lottery winning hit to generate the big hit game is put on hold (whether the big hit game can be continued) Yes (loop challenge directed).

  That is, also in the setting process concerning such a display effect pattern, the display effect pattern table at the time of hitting and the display effect pattern table at the time of losing are prepared similarly to the setting process concerning the fluctuation pattern of the symbol mentioned above, In the peripheral control board 4010, first, either the display effect pattern table at the time of hitting or the display effect pattern table at the time of losing is selected based on the result of the winning (whether or not the big hit game can be continued). . Then, by selecting any one of the display effect patterns stored in the selected display effect pattern table based on an appropriate effect random number, the loop challenge effect having the selected display effect pattern is a big hit game Will appear during the period of

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control board 4010 according to this embodiment, a plurality of display effect patterns having different hitting expectations are stored in any of the display effect pattern table at the time of hitting and the display effect pattern table at the time of losing. It is done. That is, in this case, the outcome of the drop as the loop challenge effect (whether or not the big hit game can be continued) will be shown after the effect is achieved with a different degree of hitting expectation.

  According to the setting method according to such a display effect pattern, there is no relationship between the variation time of the symbol according to the result of the big hit lottery (here, the second special symbol lottery) in the holding state. It becomes possible to appear in the form of moving forward with respect to the digestion of the big hit lottery (here, the second special symbol lottery) in which the effect pattern by which the drop can be grasped can be recognized (forward moving effect). Therefore, not only can free rendition be realized regardless of the fluctuation time of the symbol according to the result of the big hit lottery (here, the second special symbol lottery) in the holding state, it also has no adverse effect on the rendition With no effect, it will be possible to make bold settings for the symbol variation itself's time.

  And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the main control MPU 4100a, within the pullback period after the big hit game (here, more accurately, one set of big hit games) is finished (timing With regard to up to four second special symbol lottery that can be digested at t15 to t16, timing t21 to t22, etc.), a single ultra-shortened time (in this embodiment, another) as the fluctuation time regardless of the drop. It is possible to realize the game / representation as if the pullback period itself was practically eliminated by ensuring that the ultra-shortened fluctuation fluctuation pattern having a predetermined 0.099 second (shorter than fluctuation time) is selected. And

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the display effect selected from the display effect pattern table at the time of the hit, as shown in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 148 (b). As for the loop challenge effect having a pattern, this is applied to a period after the timing (for example, timing t15) at which the big hit game is ended (here, at least the timing at which the symbol variation ends being digested (for example, timing t16)) Control is made to maintain its appearance.

  For example, the second special symbol lottery in which the effect image displayed at the timing when the big hit game is ended (for example, timing t15) is held by the command from the main control MPU 4100a side (for example, the second special symbol lottery The display is continued until a period until it becomes possible to grasp that it has become 0, or a predetermined moving image is displayed until the period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the big hit game is ended for the loop challenge effect having the display effect pattern selected from the display effect pattern table at the time of the loss. Control is performed so that its appearance is maintained over a period after the timing (e.g., timing t27) (in this case, at least the timing at which the symbol variation finishes digesting (e.g., timing t28)).

  For example, the effect image displayed at the timing when the big hit game is ended (for example, timing t27) is displayed for a period after this (for example, the command from the main control MPU 4100a side that the variation of the first special symbol is started The display is continued until the period until it becomes comprehensible, or the predetermined moving image is displayed until the period.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the hit for starting the big hit game is obtained in the second special symbol lottery that is in the holding state, the result of the second special symbol lottery that is in the holding state within the period when the big hit game is performed It becomes possible to make it appear as if it was digested without knowing the symbol variation according to (or, it appears as if the symbol variation has not been performed).

  That is, in this case, when the second special symbol lottery in the hold state includes a hit to start the big hit game, the big hit game (here, one set of big hit games) is performed without any symbol change being performed. You will be able to look as if it were to be continued. On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery in the hold state does not include a hit to start the big hit game, the normal time game (the second special symbol lottery is put on hold simultaneously with the end of the big hit game Without it, it will be possible to make it appear as if the game in which the first special symbol lottery is digested is started. However, such control may be performed only when a hit to start the big hit game is obtained or not obtained in the second special symbol lottery in the holding state.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time from the symbol variation being stopped to the next symbol variation being newly started (the symbol stopping time maintained in the stopped condition) is It has been described above that the time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern (time) of the ultrashortening fluctuation. Therefore, when the display effect pattern described above is displayed over the period until the second special symbol lottery in the holding state is digested, it is difficult to make the symbol variation more noticeable even if the decorative symbol or the special symbol varies. Will be able to make it appear as if it was digested without knowing the symbol variation according to the result of the second special symbol lottery that is on hold within the period when the big hit is played .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a pullback period is created when being in the normal gaming state. According to such a configuration, in conjunction with the control relating to the above-described display effect pattern, the control situation relating to the effect situation where the loop challenge effect (display effect pattern) appears in the effect display device 1115 and the operation of the start door member 1214 While there is no change in any of the above, a transition from a period in which a big hit game is played (for example, timing t14 to t15) to a withdrawal period (for example, timing t15 to t16) is made. By the end of the period when the big hit game is performed, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot is made digestible after the jackpot game is over as the target of the loop challenge effect (display effect pattern) within the period when the jackpot game is performed. With the lottery (here, the second special symbol lottery) being used, the big hit lottery is put on hold within the period before the big hit game is started (within the period when the time saving function is activated) It is decided to perform control related to the preparation preparation that encourages them to exist as (loop challenge preparation presentation). According to such a configuration, when starting the big hit game, it is possible to create a situation (pending situation) that facilitates the appearance of the above-mentioned loop challenge effect, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Become.

  However, although such loop challenge preparation effect is performed, when starting the big hit game, the big hit lottery (here, the target of the effect (display effect pattern) within the period when the big hit game is performed There may also be a situation where the second special symbol lottery) is not held up to the holding upper limit (4).

  In such a case, if the number of pending jackpots (here, the second special symbol lottery) to be targeted for loop challenge effect (display effect pattern) within the period when a big hit game is played is 1 to 3 The setting process according to the above-described display effect pattern is performed in such a manner that the display effect pattern having a high degree of hit expectation is less likely to be selected as the number of reservations decreases. That is, as described above, the probability of whether or not the big hit game (one set of big hit games) can be generated continuously (some set of big win games (one set of big hit games)) In view of the fact that it directly affects the loop performance), the setting process according to the display effect pattern described above may be executed so that the expectation is changed according to the degree of the number of reservations. It is more desirable to improve the interest.

  On the other hand, if the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery at the start of the big hit game is 0 despite the loop challenge preparation effect being performed, within the period when the big hit game is played There is no target of loop challenge effect (display effect pattern). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the target of the effect (display effect pattern) does not exist, a specific display effect pattern is set in the setting process according to the display effect pattern. Is selected, and control is made to cause the selected specific display effect pattern to appear in a period in which a big hit game is performed. Therefore, when the big hit game is started, the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery), which is used to determine whether the big hit game (one set of big hit games) can be generated continuously, is put on hold It becomes difficult to notice that the game is not being performed, and the decline in game entertainment caused by this can be suppressed.

  Here, as setting processing concerning the above-mentioned display effect pattern in case the number of reservations of the second special symbol lottery is 0, for example, a specific display effect from a dedicated display effect pattern table when the number of reservations is 0 The pattern (display effect pattern at the time of loss) may be selected, or any one of display effect patterns having different degrees of expectation stored in the display effect pattern table at the time of loss based on an appropriate effect random number May be selected. In addition, based on the display effect pattern table at the time of the loss associated with the hold number including the hold number 0, any one of the display effect patterns having different degrees of expectation may be selected by the effect drawing .

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the target of the loop challenge effect (display effect pattern) within the period in which the big hit game is performed is all of the up to four second special symbol lotterys in the hold state. In the second special symbol lottery, it is collectively shown as a result of the display effect pattern whether or not there is a win (hit) in the event of starting a big hit game. However, instead of this, the big hit game line does not show collectively as a result of the display effect pattern whether or not there is a hit in starting the big hit game in the second special symbol lottery (hit) In the displayed period, a win may be indicated separately for the second special symbol lottery that is in the holding state.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the result of each win separately from the maximum four second special symbol lotterys in the hold state, and the game development after the big hit game is completed more reliably It is useful in that it can be grasped. However, the game and effect shown as if the game in which it is possible to obtain a large number of prizes (the game state in which the big winning opening is opened) is continuously performed while symbol variation is not performed. In view of the purpose of providing, whether or not it is possible to continuously generate a big hit game than such a presentation structure that must strongly appeal the existence of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state It can be said that the above-described effect structure, which is collectively indicated by the display effect pattern, is more preferable regardless of the number of second special symbol lotterys in which the success or failure concerning the continuity of the big hit game is held.

  By the way, the number of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state is 1 even if it is the above-mentioned effect structure where the drop is shown at once by the display effect pattern regardless of the number of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state In some cases, whether or not the player wins a jackpot game start will be clearly indicated by the second special symbol lottery that is on hold, as a result of the display effect pattern that appears within the period when the jackpot game is performed. It becomes.

  In addition, it does not need to be whether the big hit game of 1 set generate | occur | produces continuously as an object of such an effect, for example, it may be whether the big hit game generate | occur | produces continuously.

  According to the display effect pattern (advanced effect) during the period when such a big hit game is performed, not only that the game ball is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156 but also the prize winning opening 1155 even by the small hit game At the stage where it is not released, it is shown that it has succeeded in generating the second special game state (restart one set of big hit games (two big hit games)) (success game effect).

  It should be noted that, despite the uncertainty associated with the progress of such a game, the background by which such success effects are made feasible is shown in FIG. 142 (d), (e), the second When a small hit is obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery (second advantageous small hit), “If even one game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155, it is guided to the V winning opening 1156. Under such conditions (timing t3 to timing t4), a plurality of opening operations are executed with a relatively long closing interval which can create a game ball in a waiting state for winning. It does not. That is, in this case, even if there is only one game ball between timings t3 and t4 (more precisely, between timing t3 and the end of the fifth opening operation) the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 ( When the door portion 1221a) is reached, the game ball enters into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 and the game ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156 regardless of the opening / closing condition. It will be possible to confirm it.

  Then, after the success effect is produced as a result of the loop challenge effect being performed in this way, transition control is performed to a new special game state (a period in which one set of big hit games is performed (timing t16 to t22) However, in such second and subsequent special game states, the above-mentioned first bonus effect in the first special game state and the above-mentioned loop challenge preparation effect do not appear.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, first, when the hit symbol for starting the big hit game is stopped at the timing t16, the second special game state (one set of big hit games (two big hit games First, it is shown that the first half of the first stage big hit game and the second stage big hit game (the first stage big hit game) is being played))) As a bonus effect, a pre-loop challenge effect regarding whether or not the third special game state can be generated when the second special game state is ended is made to appear.

  If the small hit symbol is stopped as a hit symbol to start the big hit game at timing t16, the pre-loop challenge effect is performed from when the small hit game is performed, but the hit symbol to start the big hit game at timing t16 If the jackpot symbol is stopped, the pre-loop challenge effect will be performed from the time when the first stage jackpot game is performed.

  However, in the pre-loop challenge effect, in order to definitively show that the next special game state will occur, a maximum of 3 left as a hold state at the end of the above-mentioned pullback period (normal game state) It is required that two or more hits for starting a big hit game are included in two second special symbol lotterys. In this respect, there is a possibility that two or more second special symbol lottery may not be left on hold at the end of the above-mentioned pullback period (normal game state), or two or more (up to three) second In view of the low possibility that two or more hits to start the big hit game will be included in the second special symbol lottery even if the special symbol lottery is left as a pending state, it is usually a game in the pre-loop challenge effect The outcome expected by the person does not appear, and while the mode of presentation with a low expectation is appearing, the game and the presentation will be advanced.

  As shown in FIG. 148, such a pre-loop challenge effect continues to appear even after the first stage big hit game is over (timing t18) and is controlled to the short time game state. The pre-loop challenge effect is indicated by the pre-loop challenge effect when a small hit (second advantageous small hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery in the short time game state (timing t18) When the main effect on the effect display device 1115 is switched to an expectation UP effect that functions to change the expectation to a higher expectation, the process is ended.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has the capability to loop the above-described one set of big hit games (two big hit games) with a probability of 50% or more. Implementing the second special symbol lottery (while the chance to start a big hit game is obtained with a high probability, the second special symbol lottery while the time saving function is activated) by holding it up to the upper limit pending number of four It is

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the second special symbol is the period from the end of the above-mentioned pullback period (normal gaming state) to the time-saving gaming state (timing t16 to t18). In view of the difficulty in maintaining a large number of reservations for the lottery (the lottery where the hit to start the big hit is obtained with high probability), the effect was designed on the premise that the content of the effect with low expectation appeared The above-mentioned pre-loop challenge effect is to be executed. And on this, a certain amount of time has passed since the time saving function was activated, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery (the lottery on the side where the hit to start the big hit game is obtained with high probability) reaches the maximum In the expected period (small hit game execution period (timing t19 to t20)), the expectation UP effect functioning to change the expectation indicated by the pre-loop challenge effect to a higher expectation Is supposed to appear.

  In such a configuration, from the gaming situation where the possibility of obtaining a specific game result (here, generating the next special game state) is low, the specific game result (here, the next special game state) To change the expectation to obtain a specific game result to a higher expectation while performing transition to a gaming situation in which it is highly likely to be able to obtain become able to. Therefore, according to the expectation UP effect according to this embodiment, unlike the conventional effect of showing as if the expectation was increased although the game situation has not changed, the improvement of the game interest is made more reliable. Will be able to

  In addition, after the expectation UP effect is performed in this way, the degree of expectation is raised by the number of holdings of the second special symbol lottery (lottery in which the hit to start the big hit game is obtained with high probability) is increased Under the circumstances, the above-mentioned loop challenge effect is performed again.

  Then, every time a success effect appears in this loop challenge effect, the game is controlled to a new special game state, so the progress of the game in the special game state is the same as in the above-described effect example (timing t16 to t22) According to the above, the pre-loop challenge effect, the expectation UP effect, and the loop challenge effect are sequentially executed (timing t22 to t28).

  On the other hand, a success presentation does not appear in the loop challenge production, and a hit that starts a big hit game while the maximum 2 second special symbol lottery in the pending state is being sequentially digested (big hit, second advantageous small hit If the player can not win the game (timing t28), the game is transferred to the disadvantageous gaming state. That is, in this case, during the first special symbol lottery being repeatedly performed under the game conditions shown in FIG. 141, also in the effect display device 1115, a symbol variation effect according to the result of the first special symbol lottery (usually, Control is performed so that the loss fluctuation) appears repeatedly.

  As mentioned above, in the second and subsequent special game states, the above-mentioned loop challenge preparation effect executed in the first special game state does not appear, but after the first bonus effect is performed, the normal game From (the game to the left) to the time to restart, the effect image to continue the right is basically continuously displayed (right-handed image G6 described later). Strictly speaking, although the effect image indicating that the right-handed driving should be continued is not displayed when in the above-mentioned pullback period (for example, timing t15 to t16), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above Since it is decided to perform processing to substantially eliminate this period, it is hard to notice that the effect image to the effect that the right-handed driving should be continued has disappeared.

  According to such a configuration, it is controlled in a special gaming state (special award period) in which a large number of gaming balls can be made to win in a large winning opening (large winning opening 1154 or specials winning opening 1155) Then, if the game by right-handing is continued, the game ball will naturally be accepted by the second starting opening 1153, so it is preferable to hold the second special symbol lottery without making a loop challenge preparation effect. You will be able to maintain it.

  By the way, in the second special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, among the hits (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game, the probability of obtaining the second advantageous small hit is particularly high such as 1/6. It is considered as a probability. Therefore, when in the special game state described above, while performing the prior determination about the result of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state, and to perform the effect based on the preceding determination (so-called pre-read effect) is a game It seems to be effective in improving the interest.

  However, it is in the period when the operation of the time saving function is continued until the variation of the special symbol has been digested over 100 times, and it is not yet committed to generate the big hit game (for example, the rotating body 1236 Such pre-reading effect is performed when the gaming ball is not yet held in the receiving portion 1236a and the guiding of the gaming ball to the V winning opening 1156 is not yet assured). If the following problems arise.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that the second advantageous small hit is obtained is a high probability such as 1/6, and among the maximum four reserved numbers for the second special symbol lottery It is considered as a probability setting that it can be fully expected that a plurality of small wins (favorable small hits) will be generated.

  In this respect, for example, in the case where a preread effect for each result of the second special symbol lottery which is on hold is made to appear in a state where it is not yet committed to generate a big hit game, for example, a plurality of second special symbols While the small hit game is shown in the drawing until it is shown that the small hit (favorable small hit) is won, even if a small hit game is played, it is a big hit by preventing the game ball from entering the prize winning opening 1155. There is a concern that a gaming method may be adopted in which a game is not generated intentionally. That is, in this case, although the upper limit number of times (100 times) for the variation of the special symbol that can be continued as the time saving game state is set, the above gaming method is performed within the range where the time saving game state is not ended from the balance with the upper limit number of times. If it is used properly, the setting value required for the payout as the pachinko machine 1 may be exceeded, which may lead to a disadvantage on the hole side.

  Therefore, when performing pre-reading effect about each result of the second special symbol lottery which is on hold when in the special game state mentioned above, it is performed at the timing after it is promised to generate the big hit game It is desirable to In this case, in addition to the guaranteed big hit game, there is a possibility that four big hit games, which is the upper limit of the number of pending for the second special symbol lottery, may be additionally played, so a maximum of 5 big hit games There is a possibility that it can be recognized that 10000 game balls can be obtained from now.

  In addition, the gaming situation committed to generating a big hit game is that the gaming ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156, and more specifically, the gaming ball is received by the receiving unit 1236a. In the situation in which the game ball is held in the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 or the condition that is guided to the V prize winning opening 1156 (timing t3 to t4), the prize winning opening is It is a situation of the game ball entering the internal area of 1155.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the game in which the award can be obtained by the player is executed as one set of big hit games (two big hit games). is there.

  Therefore, for example, during the period when the operation of the time saving function is continued until the variation of the special symbol has been consumed over 100 times, it is in the holding state at the timing after it is promised to generate the big hit game If it is assumed that the pre-reading effect for each result of 2 special symbol lottery is performed, the committed big hit game is “the second stage big hit game in the current special game state”, and the first pre-reading hit (big hit The jackpot game indicated by the hit to start the game (the jackpot being shown to have won the second advantageous small hit) is "the first jackpot game in the next special game state", and two The big hit game shown in the eye look ahead is "the second stage big hit game in the next special game state", and the big hit game shown in the third look per second "next time A jackpot gaming "of the first stage in another gaming state, a is the jackpot gaming represented by fourth per lookahead" second stage jackpot gaming of the special game state of after next ".

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "second stage big hit game" can be performed naturally when the "first stage big hit game" is performed. It has been decided. Therefore, as a result of such pre-reading effect, when pre-reading is obtained with one of the 2nd special symbol lottery which is put on hold, and within the 2nd special symbol lottery put on hold. In the two cases where the pre-reading hit is obtained, it is possible to start two big hit games (the first big hit game and the second big hit game in the next special game state) at this time. It can be said that the same is true in that it is determined that it is possible. In addition, as in the case of this, as a result of such pre-reading effect, when a pre-reading hit is obtained in three of the second special symbol lottery that has been put on hold, and the second special that is put on hold In the case where the pre-reading is obtained in four of the symbol lottery, at this point all four big hit games (the first big hit game and the second big hit game in the next special game state, and It can be said that the same is true in that it is determined that it will be possible to start the first stage big hit game and the second stage big hit game in the special game state of the next and subsequent times.

  However, in fact, 2 of the second special symbol lottery that is on hold than in the case where only one of the second special symbol lottery that is on hold is that the pre-reading is obtained. In some cases, the expectation value of the number of prizes that can be acquired by the player may fall below the case where the pre-reading hit is obtained.

  For example, within the period of timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested first among the second special symbol lottery that is in the four pending state is now digested second. While the pre-reading hit is obtained in two with the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery that is digested third and the second special symbol lottery that is digested fourth It is assumed that a situation occurs in which a rendering result is shown such that a pre-reading hit is not obtained. Then, in the loop challenge effect started from timing t14, the second special gaming state is generated based on the result (pre-reading per second) of the second special symbol lottery that is digested first (one set of big hit games ( It will be shown that it has succeeded every 2) (the jackpot game is started again) (success production).

  However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested second, the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested third, and the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested fourth are left as they are on hold. Will be Therefore, when the short time game state is started at timing t18, the second special symbol lottery to be digested second is to be digested first, and based on the result (per read), one set of big hit gaming The second stage of the jackpot game will be started (timing t20).

  However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested third and the second special symbol lottery that is to be digested fourth are both left as the pending state. Therefore, in the loop challenge effect started from timing t21, even if the four second special symbol lots are put on hold, the two second special symbol lots with the earlier digesting order among them are digested third It is a second special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery to be digested fourth, it is clear that they have not already obtained a pre-reading hit. That is, in this case, it is apparent that it is practically impossible to expect to have the special gaming state looped only in the two second special symbol lotterys which are put on hold after the pre-reading effect is performed. is there.

  On the other hand, within the period of timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, among the second special symbol lottery in the four suspension state, it is only one of the second special symbol lottery in the suspension state. If the pre-reading hit is not obtained, the second special symbol state is generated by the second special symbol lottery in which the pre-reading hit is obtained (one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is started again) ) Will be.

  However, at this time, even if the second special symbol lottery for which the pre-reading hit has not been obtained is left as a pending state, all the second special symbol lottery left as a lost in the short time gaming state started from timing t18. It will be digested. That is, in this case, a loop started from timing t21 in addition to being elected to hit the jackpot game at a relatively early stage to start the big hit game by the second special symbol lottery newly put on hold in the time saving game state Also in the challenge production, it becomes possible to have an expectation of looping the special game state in all of the four second special symbol lottery newly put on hold.

  As described above, when the pre-reading hit is obtained in one of the second special symbol lottery held in the hold state, the special game state is looped also in the loop challenge effect started from the timing t21. The probability of being able to go over 50%, but when a pre-reading hit is obtained in two of the second special symbol lottery that has been put on hold, a special game in the loop challenge effect started from timing t21 The probability of being able to loop the state is approximately “11/36” (= 1− (5/6) 2), so the expected value of the number of prizes that can be obtained by the player is less than that. It is clear that

  According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be disadvantageous for the second special symbol lottery that is held on hold, as the number of wins for starting the big hit game may be large. It will be possible to make this a novelty even as a pre-reading effect on the premise of.

  On the other hand, according to such a configuration, of the second special symbol lottery in the four suspension states in the period of timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. If it is possible to obtain a hit, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case where it is possible to obtain a pre-read hit in the four second special symbol lotterys. That is, in this case, it is recognized that five big hit games are performed and it is possible to obtain 10000 game balls including the big hit game (the big hit game started from timing t14) which has been committed. You will be able to Moreover, according to such a configuration, the probability that a big hit can be obtained even from the probability that 5 big hit games are played and it is possible to obtain 10000 game balls from the probability (1/400) Can be expected to be sufficiently high, so that it is possible to preferably improve the amusement of the game.

  Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 148 to FIG. 154, when in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery wins a big hit (or an advantageous small hit), and a special gaming state (one set of big hit games (two times An example will be described for the contents of the effect when the jackpot game of) is started. The control concerning the following various effects is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a side or the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a side by providing various commands from the main control substrate 4100 side as necessary.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, at the above-mentioned timing t11, a mode (when advantageous small hit, there has been induction of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156) If, on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, the effect image EG1 displayed in the aspect (a) shows, the effect image blessing that it is possible for the player to obtain a large amount of awards EG2 appears (the first bonus effect).

  That is, when a big hit (or an advantageous small hit) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the round game is repeated 15 times in the big hit game started according to the result, but the first 11 of them are As described above, the special winning opening 1154 is opened only in a mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball in the round game of the round.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, an interval before the big hit start (see FIG. 139) which is a period created after the effect image EG1 appears, and a period during which the first 11 round games are performed Over (as shown in FIG. 140), an effect image EG2 is created to congratulate the player from being able to obtain a large amount of awards. As a result, in realizing such an effect, it is possible to set an interval before the big hit start as a relatively short time, out of the control (big hit game start processing, big hit game processing) related to the big hit game. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a round game is performed in which it is difficult to obtain a prize despite the jackpot game being started.

  Then, when 11 rounds of game are digested while such effect image EG2 appears, a special prize period in which the large winning opening 1154 is opened in a mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball (here, adventure When the bonus is finally started, an effect image EG3 indicating that will appear. Next, during this special award period (here, adventure bonus), various kinds of images resident on the display screen of the effect display device 1115 are made to appear, and these special award periods (here, adventure adventure period) are updated. The effect image EG4 in which the progress of the game during the bonus game is shown is displayed.

Here, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the following are prepared as various images resident in the effect display device 1115 when in the special prize period (here, adventure bonus), and these images are The time until the big hit game of 2 times across the short time gaming state is digested (one set of big hit games) is displayed continuously.
・ A special award image G1 showing that it is in a special award period,
・ Progress image G2 showing the progress of the game in the special award period,
-A reserved image G3 indicating the degree of expectation (loop probability) of the game after the special award period,
A stock image G4 showing that the second stage big hit game in the special award period is made executable,
A score image G5 indicating the number of awards that have been acquired in the award period,
・ Right-handed image G6 indicating that the player should hit the right in the special award period, and · background image G7 indicating the background when in the special period.
A character image G8 in which information on whether or not the award period can be continued is indicated as the action of the allied character

  According to such a configuration, after the big hit game (timing t11 to t12) corresponding to the big hit (or advantageous small hit) which has been determined to have been won by the first special symbol lottery side is started, the big hit game Depending on the result of the second special symbol lottery side that is expected to be started at an early stage after being controlled to shift to the short game state after passing the short game state (timing t12 to t14) to occur later A period until the end of the jackpot game (timing t14 to t15) is realized as a special prize effect which is shown as one special prize period (here, an adventure bonus).

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the special award period (special award effect) is provided as a gaming unit so that it can be continued (looped) with a probability of 50% or more. Such a combination of game and effect arrangement concerning the loop makes it possible to enjoy the above-mentioned special award period (special award effect) as a game unit similar to a conventional one-time big hit game. That is, in this case, from the viewpoint of the player, the comparison target of one special award period (here, adventure bonus) is a period during which a conventional one-time big hit game is performed. The player can feel as if the player has exceeded the upper limit of the award that can be obtained, and the decrease in the fun of the game can be suppressed through such games and effects.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special award period (one set of big hit games) is continued, within the period in which the second stage big hit game in the special award period is performed. Make it appear as if it was digested without knowing the symbol variation according to the result of the second special symbol lottery that is in the hold status (or make it appear that the symbol variation has not been performed) to realize the game and effect And Therefore, many of the above-mentioned resident images are basically continuously displayed even in the above-mentioned pullback period, whereby a large number of game balls can be played by winning a large number by winning the right (the large winning opening 1154 or the like). It is shown as if the special game state (special award period) which can be made to win a prize in the prize winning opening 1155 is continued without interruption, which will be described later.

  Incidentally, a character image such as "adventure bonus" appearing at the upper left in the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to the above-mentioned special award image G1 among the above-mentioned resident images. Such character images are continuously displayed not only during a big hit game in which a large amount of awards can be obtained but also during a time controlled to a time saving game state (timing 12 to t14), It can be made difficult to notice that a game (lottery game) based on a lottery when in the time-saving gaming state is performed.

  The above-mentioned effect can be expected by displaying the special award image G1, and the other images may not necessarily be displayed in order to obtain the effect.

  Further, among the above-mentioned resident images, the above-described progress image G2 corresponds to the 19 ball images appearing on the left side in the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. Here, among the 19 ball images, 4 ball images are a big hit game (timing t11 to t12 according to a big hit (or an advantageous small hit) that has been determined to have been won by the first special symbol lottery side. It is an image showing the progress of whether or not four round games, in which a large number of awards can be obtained, have been executed, among the fifteen round games. On the other hand, among the 19 ball images, 15 of the ball images are controlled to shift to the time-saving game state and are expected to be started at an early stage according to the result of the second special symbol lottery side It is an image showing the progress of whether or not 15 round games which can be obtained a large number of prizes have been executed in the big hit game (timing t14 to t15).

  In addition, about the round game considered to have been carried out (or in execution), the ball is displayed in the aspect black-filled.

  According to such a configuration, the jackpot game according to the result of the lottery already made winning when in the normal gaming state, and provided at a relatively early stage after the control to the time-saving gaming state is performed However, it is expected that it will be realized as a special prize presentation that shows two games with the jackpot game whose execution time has not been determined yet as one special award period. However, with the big hit game (timing t14-t15) which is expected to be offered relatively early after control to the time saving game state is done, but the execution time is not yet decided. If the number of lottery in the short time game state (timing t12 to t14) exceeds 100 times while the big hit game does not occur, it may not be performed. That is, since the progress display is forced to appear from a stage where such a possibility is not completely eliminated, it is possible to realize a special prize presentation to be shown as a special prize period exceeding conventional common sense. Will be able to

  Further, the progress image G2 is continuously displayed not only in the big hit game in which a large amount of awards can be obtained but also in the time period (timing 12 to t14) controlled to the short time gaming state. Thereby, it can be made difficult to notice that a game (lottery game) mainly based on a lottery when in the time saving game state is performed.

  Furthermore, according to the progress image G2, since the number of round games in the big hit game for two will be displayed, the upper limit value of the prize that can be obtained by the player in the special prize period per one time It is possible to give the player an impression as if it is breaking through.

  Although it is extremely rare, if there is a situation where the number of lottery in the short time game state (timing t12 to t14) exceeds 100 times while the big hit game does not occur, 19 pieces The end of the special award period is indicated while the progress of the midway progress is shown, in which 15 of the ball images of 1 are not blacked out. That is, in this case, such a situation occurs because it becomes possible to grasp that the opportunity to obtain an award in the 15 round games was lost, which should have been originally made obtainable. Even in such a case, it is possible to feel the excellent award payout performance as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  These effects can be expected by displaying the progress image G2, and the other images may not necessarily be displayed to obtain the effects.

  Further, among the above-mentioned resident images, the above-mentioned reserved image G3 corresponds to a decorative image displayed side by side on the lower side in the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. Here, these four decorative images originally indicate the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery, and when there is a second special symbol lottery in the pending state, a heart-shaped decorative image is additionally added. It is supposed to be displayed. However, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the loop probability (continuity probability) when the special award period (special award effect) is used as a gaming unit, rather than indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is used. It is supposed to function as an indicator.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, the loop probability of the game (looping the special game state when the special award period (special award effect) is used as a gaming unit, depending on the number of pending numbers of the second special symbol lottery The probability of being able to Then, during the special prize period (special prize effect) started according to the result of the first special symbol lottery when in the normal gaming state, during the period when the first stage big hit game (timing 11 to t12) is performed As described above, there is no possibility that the second special symbol lottery has already been put on hold or will be put on hold again (function by start opening door member 1214 (tonboro type movable member)) .

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, such a reserved image G3 is generated after the big hit game from the start of the big hit game of the first step to the short time gaming state (timing t12 to t14) Until after the big hit game (timing t14 to t15) according to the result of the second special symbol lottery side expected to be started at an early stage after being controlled to shift to the short game state after passing through At least for the period of the (special award period).

  According to such a configuration, first, the display of the holding image G3 is started while there is no possibility that the second special symbol lottery has already been held or newly put on hold. As a result, it can be made difficult to notice that the reserved image G3 indicates the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery to the player side.

  And although this will be described later, in this embodiment, when being controlled to the short time game state in the special prize period, the number of the above-mentioned reserved images G3 is increased to increase the loop probability of the special prize period. Will be prompted to do. That is, in this case, the interest of the player when in the time-saving game state is not controlled to obtain a hit that can newly start the second stage big hit game, but is controlled within the special prize period (special prize effect) It is in how much the loop probability can be raised among them, and it can be made difficult to notice that a game (lottery game) mainly composed of a lottery when in the time-saving gaming state is performed through such effects. It will be.

  These effects can be expected by displaying the hold image G3, and the other images may not necessarily be displayed to obtain the effect.

  In addition, the character image displayed on the lower right side in the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to the stock image G4 of the resident images described above. According to such stock image G4, it is shown that the second stage of the jackpot game in the special award period can be made executable, so that the player can be made to be able to be acquired in the one-time special award period. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the upper limit of the award has been exceeded.

  The above-mentioned effect can be expected by displaying the stock image G4, and the other images may not necessarily be displayed in order to obtain the effect.

  In addition, the score image G5 among the resident images described above corresponds to the score image displayed on the upper right side of the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. The score image G5 is updated each time the game ball is paid out by the winning of the large winning opening 1154, whereby the score image G5 is acquired by the player after the start of the special award period (special award effect). It indicates the total number of awards. Therefore, when a loop of special prize period (special prize direction) succeeds in the above-mentioned loop challenge production, it will rush to the next special prize period (special prize production) by taking over this score.

  The right-handed image G6 in the resident image described above corresponds to an arrow image described as “right-handed” displayed on the upper right side of the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. According to such a right-handed image G6, it becomes possible to grasp that the right-handed driving should be performed continuously in the special award period.

  Further, the background image G7 in the resident image described above is, for example, a decoration image displayed on the upper side in the effect image EG4 shown in FIG. 149, and the special award period (special award effect) It shows that it is in the state to be performed. According to such background image G7, it is possible to make the player aware that the period in which the big hit game is played and the period controlled to the short time game state are the same special period.

  Further, among the effect images EG4 shown in FIG. 149, the character image G8 of the resident images described above corresponds to an ally character walking in the right direction as if implying a right-handed hit. As the character image G8 performs various actions in the special award period, the degree of expectation for winning which can continue the special award period and the win are indicated according to the type of the action.

  The above-mentioned effect can be expected by displaying the character image G8, and the other images may not necessarily be displayed in order to obtain the effect.

  Then, assuming that the first stage big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery is finished and the end interval is digested while such effect image EG4 is appearing, at the timing t12 The effect image EG5 when in the gaming state appears. However, as described above, in this embodiment, basically the same image is continuously displayed when the big hit game is being played and when it is controlled to the short time game state, There is no major difference in basic appearance with the image EG4, and each update of the progress image G2 and the score image G5 due to the progress of the special award period (special award direction) relatively advancing. Updating of the above-mentioned reserved image G3 when there is a winning on the second starting opening 1153, and further, the variation display of the decorative symbol when the second special symbol lottery is performed is performed at a place where it is not so noticeable The difference remains.

  Usually, a small hit (second advantageous small hit) will be obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery at a relatively early stage (a high probability of 1/6) in which such a game is played. That is, in this case, the second hit in the special prize period will be started only by playing the game by right-handing, but when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is obtained, the second on-hold state is held Since it is in the state immediately after the special symbol lottery is digested, the number of pending for the second special symbol lottery may not have reached at least the upper limit (4) (at most one less than the upper limit) Sex) is high. Therefore, when an advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery when in the time-saving game state, the effect image EG6 is displayed to emphasize and show that it is necessary to hit the right within the fluctuation period of the symbol. It is like that.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as such an effect image EG6, as shown in FIG. 149, a state in which an ally character in an adventure encounters an enemy character and faces it is displayed. Therefore, it is decided to use the effect image that is shown emphasizing that it should be hit on the right.

  And, as a result that the advantageous small hit is obtained in this way, when the control (small hit game start processing, small hit gaming processing) concerning small hit game comes to be started (timing t13), the symbol combination at the time of advantageous small hit Is displayed in a less noticeable manner, the game preparation period (second special symbol lottery) may be made to be newly put on hold by promoting acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 A game in which the player can select whether or not to generate a bonus game state (big hit game) in which a bonus is given to the player in response to a small hit game start process) and the result of the game in the game preparation period. As described above, the special branching period (small hit game processing) in which (small hit game) is provided is created.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, first, the second starting opening 1153 is operated while the time saving function is operating in the above-mentioned game preparation period (period in which the small hit game start processing is mainly performed). The effect image EG7 for prompting the player to play the game is made to appear so as to enter the game ball. Thus, by causing the effect image EG7 to appear at the interval before the start of the small hitting game after stopping the symbol, not within the changing period of the symbol, the time required for changing the symbol in the short time game is suitably shortened. Will be able to

  In this effect image EG7, in addition to being prompted to reserve the second special symbol lottery reserve, whether the loop probability of the special award period is improved to a high probability value of 50% or more by the display mode according to the reserve image G3 It is made for the player to be able to grasp.

  More specifically, the loop probability of the award period is gradually increased by adding the letter of "power" to each of the hold display each time the hold display for the second special symbol lottery is made. Are able to understand what they are doing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 150, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery reaches the upper limit value, the characters of "power MAX" appear across the four suspension displays for the second special symbol lottery. By causing the effect image EG8 to appear, it is possible for the player to grasp that the loop probability of the special award period has been improved to a high probability value of 50% or more.

  As described above, although the pending display is originally displayed separately for each lottery, it indicates the number of lotterys in the pending state, the order of digestion, etc., but the second special symbol lottery By making it appear as one display body (power MAX) when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit value, rather than indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery, the special award period (special award effect) Can be functioned as an indication of the loop probability (continuity probability) when.

  And, as described above, when the game preparation period is ended as a result of the game progressing while such effects are performed, the player receives the loop probability determined as a result of the game in the game preparation period and the player side On the other hand, a special branch period is created in which a game (small hit game) is made available that allows the user to select "Do you want to proceed with the game as it is or is it given a reset opportunity for loop probability?" It becomes.

  Here, when it is selected by the player to advance the game with the loop probability determined as a result of the game in the game preparation period, the player enters the game ball in the big winning opening 1154. It will continue to hit the right.

  At this point, in the effect display device 1115, it is first confirmed that at least one game ball has entered the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 when the timing t3 to t4 (see FIG. 142 (d)) is present. At the point (the prize winning opening sensor 1224), the effect image EG9 showing that the gaming ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156 is made to appear. Next, in view of the fact that the timing at which the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 operates from the storage position to the discharge position (the timing at which the gaming ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156) is predetermined, this timing comes An effect image on which the countdown effect up to is performed may be made to appear. Then, when the gaming ball is actually guided to the V winning opening 1156, a rendering image EG10 indicating that effect is made to appear.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 150 as the effect image EG9, while it is guaranteed that the game ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156, the special award period (one set of big hit games) is continued. In order to perform an advance effect in which the degree of expectation which can be caused is shown, it is assumed that a effect image in which a friend character holds aura is depicted. Then, as the effect image EG10, as shown in FIG. 150, the aura stored in this way is exploded when the gaming ball is actually induced to the V winning opening 1156, and the size of the aura appeared as a result thereof The effect image on which the leading effect is performed is used by indicating the degree of expectation by which the special award period (one set of big hit games) can be continued by the sheath color.

  According to such effect images EG9 and EG10, after the effect image EG9 showing that the gaming ball is induced to the V winning opening 1156 appears, a redundant time until the game ball is actually induced Will be able to give

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 151 to FIG. 154, when the second stage big hit game is started by the induction of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156, first, the above-mentioned display effect The setting process concerning the pattern is performed. Then, control is performed such that the loop challenge effect is developed with the display effect pattern selected as a result of the setting process for the display effect pattern.

  Here, each display effect pattern selected in the setting process concerning the above-mentioned display effect pattern is set so as to pass through any one of the progress paths of the effects shown in FIG. Then, when progressing to any of the plurality of effect images in the win effect zone of the dashed dotted line, the special prize period (one set of big hit games) is continued (any of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state) The fact that the hit to start the big hit game has been obtained is clearly indicated (winning).

  On the other hand, when the adventure end effect EG54 is started without progressing to any of the plurality of effect images in the winning effect zone and the adventure end effect EG54 is ended as it is, the special prize period (one set of It is clearly shown that the game will end without the continuation of the big hit game and will be redone from the normal time game (dropout).

  In the adventure end effect EG 54 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154 (t), an effect image EG 54a in which a state in which an ally character is attacked and attacked by an enemy character is depicted and then a loop challenge effect fails. The effect image appears in the following order: effect image EG 54 b indicating that the special award period (special game state) is to be ended → effect image EG 54 c as a still image in which the face of the ally character regrets It has become.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, it appears as if it has been digested without knowing the symbol variation according to the result of the second special symbol lottery that is on hold within the period when the big hit game is played ( Alternatively, as described above, the effect is realized that the design does not seem to be changed.

  More specifically, when the adventure end effect EG54 appears in the loop challenge effect having the display effect pattern at the time of the loss, the adventure end effect EG54 is used after the timing at which the big hit game is ended (for example, timing t27). Control (for example, effect image EG54c) to be displayed over a period (for example, a period until timing t28 when it is possible to grasp that the second special symbol lottery in the holding state becomes 0 by a command from the main control MPU 4100a side) Is controlled to be displayed over the period up to the timing t28.

  In this embodiment, after the effect image EG 54c appears in the time when the second stage of the big hit game is played, until the timing t28 when the second special symbol lottery in the hold state becomes 0 comes , There is no occurrence of presentation progress (branch of presentation) from the presentation image EG 54c.

  Hereinafter, the contents of the effects of the display effect patterns selected in the setting process according to the display effect pattern described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Now, at timing t14, when the second stage of the big hit game is started, it is assumed that the display effect pattern at the time of losing is selected as a result of the setting process according to the above-mentioned display effect pattern being performed. Then, as the loop challenge effect (advanced effect), first, it is possible to show which of the teammate character and the enemy character take the first offensive attack due to pressure from the state where the effect image EG10 (see FIG. 150) appears. The effect image EG21 (see FIG. 150 (i)) depicted in the image, and the effect image EG41 (see FIG. 153 (o)) in which it is definitely shown that the enemy character's foot is projected and the enemy character can take the first attack. It will be made to shift to the state where one of them appears (high expectation display effect pattern, low expectation display effect pattern).

  However, if the display effect pattern at the time of the loss is selected, it is the case where either the effect image EG21 (display effect pattern with high expectation) or the effect image EG41 (display effect pattern with low expectation) appears Also after that, the effect image EG42 (see FIG. 153 (p)) in which the first strike by the enemy is performed → effect image EG53 in which the cut-in by the enemy character is performed (see FIG. 153 (s)) → adventure end effect EG 54 (see FIG. As the contents of the effect are developed in the order such as FIG. 154 (t)), it will be definitively shown that the game will be redone from the normal time (failed selection).

  On the other hand, when the second stage of the big hit game is started and the display effect pattern at the time of hit is selected as a result of the setting processing according to the above-mentioned display effect pattern being performed, as the above loop challenge effect First, the effect image EG11 (see FIG. 152 (a)) in which the ally character is projected to show that the ally character takes the first attack is clearly shown, and the ally character and the enemy character both squeeze each other to take the first attack. An effect image EG21 (see FIG. 152 (i)) drawn as if it were filled up, and an effect image EG41 (figure shown in FIG. 152) that the enemy character's feet are projected to be taken first by the enemy character. 153 (o) (see the display effect pattern of winning confirmation, the display effect pattern of high expectation, Display effect pattern expected).

  However, among them, even when the effect image EG41 (display effect pattern of low expectation) appears, if the display effect pattern at the time of hitting is selected, the effect image EG42 (the enemy's first strike is performed After the appearance of FIG. 153 (p)), the game proceeds to a winning effect zone by the effect image EG 43 (see FIG. 153 (q)) in which another ally character appears, or in the middle stage of the adventure end effect EG 54 The effect image EG 44 (see FIG. 153 (r)) is displayed to show a situation in which the dog as a friend of the allied character is barking, and the game proceeds to the winning effect zone. As a result, even when a low expectation display effect pattern appears in the loop challenge effect, it is possible to have an expectation that the special award period (one set of big hit games) will be continued.

  On the other hand, when the effect image EG21 (display effect pattern with high expectation) appears as a result of selection of the display effect pattern at the time of hitting, each progress in the display effect pattern with low expectation (progress to effect image EG43, In addition to (progress to effect image EG44), it is further expected that there may be progress to effect image EG12 (see FIG. 152 (b)) in which a first strike by an ally character is performed after the effect image EG21 appears It has an effect structure that can be

  Therefore, in the setting process according to the display effect pattern described above, the effect image EG21 (display effect pattern with high expectation) appears more than the case where the effect image EG41 (display effect pattern with low expectation) appears. The display effect pattern is selected in such a manner that the probability of progressing to the winning effect zone becomes high.

  On the other hand, when the effect image EG11 (display effect pattern of hit determination) appears as a result of selecting the display effect pattern of hitting, it is determined that the special award period (one set of big hit games) is continued at this time Shown. However, in this case, since the new special award period (one set of big hit games) is generated as if it continues from the special award period, in combination with the above-mentioned configuration related to the ultra-shortening fluctuation, etc. Not only the period left as the second stage big hit game, but also the first stage big hit game in the new special award period and the subsequent period (such as the time when the short game state or the small hit game is played) A presentation period will be created.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the loss stored in the display effect pattern table at the time of the loss, the symbol serving as the rendering object of the loop challenge effect is digested by the super shortening fluctuation. While the content of the effect within the period up to the end timing (for example, timing t28) is determined, the display effect pattern of the hit time stored in the display effect pattern table of the hit time is within the same period. In addition to determining the content of the effect, it will further determine the content of the effect as to whether the special award period after the design of the target of the loop challenge effect has been digested by the ultra-shortening variation will continue further. ing.

  In particular, with regard to the display effect pattern at the time of hitting, the content of the effect within the period (for example, timing t14 to t20 etc.) until the setting processing concerning the above-mentioned display effect pattern is performed again is determined. The content of the display in units of one set of big hit games is to be determined by.

  According to such a configuration, since the display effect pattern of the above hit continuously appears over the period in which the two big hit games are performed, the two big hit games are actually interrupted by the fluctuation period of the symbol. Can be made even more difficult to notice.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, after the effect image EG11 (display effect pattern of hit determination) appears, the effect image in which the first strike by the ally character is performed as the effect image of the progress destination EG12 (see FIG. 152 (b)), effect image EG13 (see FIG. 152 (c)) in which the type of attack by the ally character is selected, effect image attacked by the type selected in the effect image EG13 (effect image EG14 (See FIG. 152 (d)), EG 24 (See FIG. 152 (j), and EG 34 (See FIG. 153 (m)) are made to sequentially appear. Then, as a result of the attack by the ally character, the enemy was defeated (effect image EG15 (see FIG. 152 (e)), or the enemy was damaged (effect image EG 25 (see FIG. 153 (k))), Any one of whether or not the attack has been fought (the effect image EG35 (see FIG. 152 (n))) is made to appear with the above-mentioned period of ultrashortening fluctuation (for example, timing t15 to t16) in between.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, after the effect image EG11 definitely indicates that the special award period (one set of big hit games) is continued, the special award period (one set of big hit games An effect (pre-loop challenge effect) indicating the degree of anticipation as to whether the newly generated special award period is further continued after the end of. Then, the period from the start of such an effect to the appearance of the result appears in the form of the period of the above-mentioned ultra-shortening fluctuation (for example, timing t15 to t16), thereby making two It becomes more difficult to notice that the big hit game is actually interrupted by the fluctuation period of the symbol.

  For example, when a special attack technique is selected as an attack by the teammate character (effect images EG13 and EG14), it is determined that the newly generated special award period is further continued at this time. Then, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is an enemy based on the start of the first stage big hit game in the new special award period, with the above-mentioned ultra-shortening fluctuation period (for example, timing t15 to t16) interposed. Control is performed such that the effect image EG15 for defeating the character and the effect image EG16 for congratulating the ally character for victory appear sequentially. Next, within the period of symbol variation when winning in a hit to generate a big hit game in the short time game state, effect image EG17 (see FIG. 152 (g)) where a teammate character meets a new enemy character is made to appear. And then, within the period until the second stage big hit game is started (small hit game period and big hit fluctuation time), the expected degree indicated by the pre-loop challenge effect is higher expectation level An effect level image as an expectation level UP effect (functioning to be changed to a higher expectation level because the expectation level is already 100% in the case of the effect route where the special move is selected) that functions to change to EG 18 (see FIG. 152 (h)) will appear.

  However, in such a pre-loop challenge effect, it is difficult for the player's expected result to appear and it is easy for the game and the effect to be advanced while the low expectation effect mode is appearing. Is as described above. Therefore, it is rare that the effect is developed in the effect route where such special move is selected, and usually, an effect image EG 24 (a effect with low expectation, in which a strong attack is selected as an attack by the ally character (See FIG. 152 (j)) Or effect image EG 34 (a super-low expectation effect (see FIG. 153 (m))) in which a weak attack is selected as an attack by the ally character will appear.

  And, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first based on the start of the first stage big hit game in the new special award period, with the above-mentioned ultra-shortening fluctuation period (for example, timing t15 to t16) interposed. An effect image EG 25 (a low-expected effect (see FIG. 153 (k)) for giving damage to an enemy character and an effect image EG 35 (a super-low expectation effect (see FIG. 153 (n)) Make one appear with). Next, within the period of symbol variation when winning in a hit to generate a big hit game in the short time game state, a production image EG26 in which words that the ally character spews or inspires against the strength of the enemy character appear (See FIG. 153 (l)). And then, within the period until the second stage big hit game is started, as the expectation UP effect which functions to change the expectation indicated by the pre-loop challenge effect to a higher expectation The effect image EG18 (see FIG. 152 (h)) is caused to appear.

  According to such a configuration, although a low degree of expectation is indicated by the pre-loop challenge effect until the effect image EG18 as the degree of expectation UP effect appears, the effect image EG18 as the degree of expectation UP effect appears after this Then, since the above-described processing is performed in which the degree of expectation is actually increased, the decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed.

  In the pre-loop challenge effect, a low expectation is shown even when either strong attack (effect image EG24) or weak attack (effect image EG34) is selected as the type of attack by the ally character. Even if the enemy character hurts the enemy character by the attack of the ally character (effect image EG25) or the attack by the enemy character (effect image EG35), a low expectation is shown in any case. It has become. However, depending on the combination of the type of attack by the ally character and the result of the attack on the enemy character, the possibility of continuing the new award period can be dramatically increased (the degree of expectation exceeding the addition value of those expectation degrees). May be That is, in this case, it can be made more difficult to notice that the two big hit games are actually disconnected due to the fluctuation period of the symbol.

  Then, regardless of passing through any of the effect routes as a display effect pattern of hitting, in this way effect image EG18 as the degree of expectation UP effect appears and when it is in a situation where the big hit game of the second stage is started The setting process concerning the display effect pattern of is performed again, and the loop challenge effect of the display effect pattern according to the result is newly started (effect image EG11, effect image EG21, or effect image EG41) .

  Thus, in the loop challenge effect which is newly started, a battle with an enemy character encountered in the effect image EG17 is drawn on condition that the effect image EG17 appears in the previous loop challenge effect, but the previous time When the effect image EG17 does not appear in the loop challenge effect, the continuation of the battle with the enemy character fought in the previous loop challenge effect is drawn.

  However, in the loop challenge production, either a strong attack (effect image EG24) or a weak attack (effect image EG34) is displayed as the type of attack by the ally character while the continuation of the battle with the enemy character is drawn. When selected, control is made to cause the effect image EG15 to defeat the enemy character to appear based on the start of the big hit game regardless of the degree of expectation (pre loop challenge effect).

  That is, in this case, as the number of times the jackpot game (special award period) continues is increased, new enemy characters can be made to appear, and effects that are less likely to get tired can be realized. Moreover, according to the control by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the next enemy character and the next enemy character are selected according to the progress path (the display effect pattern at the time of hitting) when the big hit game (special award period) is continued. Because the battle starts earlier or later, it will be possible to provide enjoyment not only to the number of times the jackpot game (special award period) is continued but also to the development destination of the presentation.

  In the case of progressing to the winning effect zone by the effect image EG43 in which another ally character appears, the continuation of the special prize period is definitely shown at this point, but the special attack technique in the pre-loop challenge effect A player-side penalty is generated such that the player can not pass through the effect path (effect image EG14) or the effect path for strong attack (effect image EG24). In addition, even when progressing to the winning presentation zone by the effect image EG44 in which the appearance of the dog being a friend of the friend character being crawled is shown, the continuation of the special award period is clearly shown at this point, The player is given a penalty such as losing the opportunity to show the degree of expectation in the loop challenge production.

  However, since all of these effect patterns are progress to the winning effect zone from the situation where the special prize period may end, even if a progressive penalty is caused by the progress, it is The decline will be suppressed.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when performing the setting process according to the above-mentioned display effect pattern, a special display effect pattern can be selected as the display effect pattern at the time of hitting.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 151, when a special display effect pattern is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs effect image EG21 (see FIG. 152 (i)) and effect image EG41 (FIG. 153 (o) The loop challenge rendition is started by making one of them appear. However, in the loop challenge effect started in this way, the adventure ends without progressing to the effect image EG 43 (see FIG. 153 (q)) in which another ally character appears despite the display effect pattern at the time of hitting. An effect image EG44 (FIG. 153 (r) in which the appearance that the dog as a friend of the friend character is crawling is shown in the middle stage of the adventure end effect EG 54 from the start of the effect EG 54 (see FIG. 154 (t)). Progress to the reference).

  However, on the other hand, the adventure end effect EG 54 (see FIG. 154 (t)) is not ended as it is, but the timing (for example, timing t15) at which the second stage big hit game is ended The timing (for example, timing t17) when the timing (for example, timing t16) when the symbol which becomes the object of presentation ends in the super shortening fluctuation is digested, and the new special prize period (one set of big hit games) starts The adventure end effect EG 54 is to be continued until the period.

  For example, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, first, an effect image EG55 (see FIG. 154 (u)) is displayed in which a manner in which the ally character is further attacked by the enemy is shown. Such an attack from the enemy, for example, will continue to be performed until the first stage of the big hit game in the new special award period is over, and the hit to generate the big hit game in the short time game state is obtained. Finally, the effect image EG 56 (see FIG. 154 (v)) in which the ally character falls down is displayed.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a dog who is a friend of a teammate character should originally appear as the effect image EG44 within a period until the second stage of the big hit game is started. An effect image EG 57 (see FIG. 154 (w)) is made to appear, showing the appearance of being apologetic for coming late.

  According to such a configuration, the contents of the adventure end effect EG 54 (the enemy character is greatly attacked and the ally character is greatly inferior) are continuously displayed as they are described. That is, in this case, although the special award period (one set of big hit games) has already been continued and a new special award period has occurred, a situation occurs in which the player advances the game without noticing this. It will be possible.

  However, on the other hand, even if the player does not notice that a new big hit game is occurring at first, contrary to the contents of the production in a relatively long period until the newly generated big hit game has been digested Since a gaming situation in which a large amount of prizes is paid out is created, providing a game and presentation such as whether it is possible to notice that a new award period has occurred at any stage in such a gaming and staging situation You will be able to

  In the end, since the effect image EG 57 appearing as if the dog that should have appeared as the effect image EG 44 has come to appear, this is suitably suppressed also for the decrease in the game interest Will be able to

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, it can be made more difficult to notice that the two big hit games are actually disconnected due to the fluctuation period of the symbol. In addition, when the display effect pattern at the time of losing appears, it is possible to have an expectation until the last end of the adventure end effect EG54.

  However, such a special display effect is provided to ensure that no new award period is generated after a specific timing after the advent of the adventure end effect EG54 (when the effect image EG44 appears). It is desirable not to always provide the pattern.

  That is, in this case, the effect image EG 54 c appearing after the above-mentioned specific timing can be functioned as an effect image of the drop finalization decision, and the second stage is in the holding state among the appearance of such a defeat finalization effect image The special symbol lottery starts to be digested, and these can be digested at high speed by ultra-shortened fluctuation.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 152 to 154, in various effect images that appear due to the display effect pattern, the progress image G2, the score image G6, and the like are updated each time.

  However, as for the progress image G2 among these images, the progress is re-started from 0 each time a big hit game of one set ends and a new special award period occurs. However, in this case, even in the first stage big hit game, it will be possible to obtain a large number of awards in all 15 round games (a big hit game according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) The progress image G2 indicating the progress of the game in the special award period is represented as 30 ball images on the left side in the effect image.

  In addition, the progress image G2 and the score image G6 may not necessarily be displayed because there is a concern that it will be easy to grasp that they are not in the execution period of the big hit game if their progress does not progress. Good.

  On the other hand, when there is a shortage in preparation for the game (number of pending second special symbol lotterys) in the game preparation period (effect image EG7, EG8), the player can not be convinced by the loop probability defined thereby Although the effect image EG8 appears, the right hitting is canceled so that the game ball is not entered into the big winning opening 1154.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1115, until the timing t4 (see FIG. 142 (d)) at which the possibility of the game ball being guided to the V winning opening 1156 is eliminated comes, the effect image EG8 is generated. It will maintain the display. As a result, when the timing t4 (see FIG. 142 (d)) arrives, the effect image EG30 indicating that it will be redone (re-preparation) from the game concerning setting of the loop probability is made to appear. And after this, the effect image EG5 will appear when the player is in the short time game state, and as a result of the second special symbol lottery at a relatively early stage (1/6 high probability), a small hit (second advantageous small) A game will be played to continue the right strike until the hit is obtained.

  However, as described above, when the number of lottery (total value of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) after being controlled to the time saving game state reaches 100 times, the time saving game state is ended. Is returned to the normal gaming state.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when reaching 100 times, there is a hit (big hit, small hit) to generate a big hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the holding state. If so, the adventure end effect EG 54 is made to appear within the 100th symbol variation based on the result of the determination. And, when there is a hit (big hit, small hit) to generate a big hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the pending state, to perform processing to switch the image from effect image EG 54 b to effect image EG 44 On the other hand, when there is no hit (big hit, small hit) for generating a big hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the pending state, processing is performed for image switching from the effect image EG 54 b to the effect image EG 54 c.

  Then, after the image switching to the effect image EG44 is performed, the effect image will be developed in the order of the effect image EG1 and the effect image EG2 as in the case where the hit is obtained in the normal game. .

  On the other hand, after the image switching to the effect image EG 54 c is performed, the digestion of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state is started while the effect image EG 54 c is appearing, and these are extremely shortened by the change By digesting at high speed, it will be possible to start over from the normal game.

  On the other hand, when it is in the short game state during the special award period, it is conceivable that a jackpot of something rare is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. In such a case as well, as in the case where an advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery when in the short time game state, it emphasizes that it should strike right within the fluctuation period of the symbol The effect image EG6 will be made to appear.

  However, in this case, when the variation period of the symbol ends and the symbol at the time of big hit is stopped, it is different from the case where the symbol at the time of advantageous small hit is stopped (game preparation period, special branch period) Since the time saving function is stopped and control (big hit game start processing, big hit game processing) concerning big hit game is started, effect images EG7 and EG8 in the game preparation period and effect image EG9 in the special branch period EG10 and EG30 will not appear.

  Therefore, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery when in the special game period within the special award period, after making the effect image EG6 appear, according to the result of the setting process according to the above-mentioned display effect pattern The display effect pattern according to the response is made to appear (see FIG. 151). In this sense, since the game preparation for improving the loop probability and the opportunity for the preparation are not given, the loop probability in the loop challenge game is likely to be adversely affected. It can be said that it is more disadvantageous for the player when the big hit is obtained than when the small hit is obtained.

  Also, on the other hand, when in the special game period, there is no second special symbol lottery in the hold state, and a big hit game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery in the hold state being digested. Such a case is also conceivable. In such a case, a big hit game in which a large number of prizes can be obtained in four round games out of the 15 round games is played, and after the big hit game, it is controlled again to the time saving game state. The Rukoto. However, in this case, since the award period per time is substantially extended, there is a problem that consistency can not be obtained with the progress display of the progress image G2 already displayed. It occurs.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, first, of the 15 round games, the first 11 round games (a game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened only in a mode in which it is difficult to enter game balls) While the game is being performed, an effect of newly adding four ball images (a ball image in a non-blacked state) to the nineteen ball images displayed as the progress image G2 is performed. Then, when four round games (games in which the large winning opening 1154 is opened in a manner that makes it easy to enter the game ball) are digested, four out of the twenty-three ball images increased to 23 are sequentially It is painted black and it is made to perform processing to update this. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the fact that the special prize period has been substantially extended, as well as to be able to achieve consistency in relation to the actual game, so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is effective to perform effects based on the prior determination when it is in the special prize period (special game state) in order to improve the game interest. It is. However, a state where it is not yet committed to generate a big hit game during the time controlled to the time saving game state (eg, the game ball is not held yet at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, V winning opening It has also been mentioned above that problems will arise if such an advance rendering is performed when the gaming ball is in a state of not being promised to be induced to 1156.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, each result of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state in the period after the effect image EG9 appears (after the big hit game is committed to being generated). It is decided to carry out the leading rendition of.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, pre-reading effect is performed in the presence of the effect image EG10, or forward effect (loop challenge effect) is performed within the execution period of the big hit game thereafter. However, with these leading effects, it is at least at the time that the special award period (special award effect) is used as the gaming unit, rather than the one for which the expectation for each hit is shown separately for the second special symbol lottery in the holding state. It is intended to function as an indicator (or an indicator indicating the degree of expectation) of how many times the loop can be continued.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, when a hit is obtained in two of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state, the second special symbol lottery in the hold state is In some cases, the expectation value of the number of prizes that can be acquired by the player may be lower than when the win is made in one of them. Therefore, instead of providing the result image of the prior determination separately for each pending display for the second special symbol lottery in the pending state, one of the results of the prior determination for all the second special symbol lottery in the pending state When the special award period (special award effect) is used as a gaming unit by making the effect result appear, it functions as an indicator (or an indicator showing the degree of expectation) at least how many times this can be looped (continue). It is desirable to make it

  That is, in this case, when a hit is obtained in two of the second special symbol lotterys in the hold state, as a result of the preceding effect, one in the second special symbol lotterys in the hold state The effect image with a lower degree of expectation is more likely to appear than when a hit is obtained.

  On the other hand, when the hit is obtained in three of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state and in the case where the hit is obtained in four of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state As mentioned above, five big hit games will be played in any case and it will be possible to obtain 10000 game balls, so it is the same as the result depending on its leading effects An effect image is made to appear.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, when it is possible to obtain such a large number of prizes (10,000), the point at which the game ball is accepted in the V winning hole 1156 (a big hit game is generated Precedingly showing immediately (or within a period of time from when the game ball is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 to when the opening of the big winning opening 1154 is started by the big hit game) at a time determined in a controlled manner) The effect can be executed, which can show the player that five big hit games will be performed, including the first big hit game corresponding to the reception of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156. It is like that.

  It should be noted that, in order to realize such an advance effect, the target determination in which the result of the second special symbol lottery is determined in advance is itself at a time before the game ball is accepted in V winning opening 1156, for example, It is desirable to be performed when the second special symbol lottery is put on hold (when the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 1153). That is, in this case, the leading effect is performed when the execution timing of the leading effect arrives while maintaining the holding state without the lottery in which the specific result is obtained in the preceding determination being stored. If D is digested before it arrives, the pre-rendering effect will not be performed even though the pre-determination has obtained a specific result.

  In the above embodiment, the game ball is entered into the second starting opening 1153 while the time saving function is activated in the period before the small hit game is started (the small hit interval before the start of the small hit game) Effect images EG7 and EG8 prompting the player to play a game. However, the effect images EG7 and EG8 may be played within the period after the small hit game is started.

  For example, within the period from timing t3 to t4 shown in FIG. 142 (d), the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 a plurality of times (opening of the prize winning opening 1155). It is promised that a big hit game will be generated if the effect images EG7 and EG8 are made to appear in the close interval (or the small hit game end interval) by providing a relatively long close interval. The second special symbol lottery is newly put on hold in a state in which the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 or the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156, for example. Will be able to That is, in this case, since the game ball can enter the second starting opening 1153 and can immediately perform the leading effect, the leading effect excellent in game responsiveness can be realized. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, even if the player performs the small hit game in response to the result of the preceding effect concerning the loop (continuing) expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the special award period. By preventing the game ball from entering the prize winning opening 1155, it is possible not to adopt a gaming method such as not to cause a big hit game to occur. However, if the game design is performed on the premise that such a game technique is adopted, the period before the effect image EG9 appears (before it is promised to generate a big hit game) In the above, the leading effect may be performed for each result of the second special symbol lottery that is on hold. That is, in this case, based on the result of the leading effect, do you obtain a game opportunity that can replace the lottery in the hold state with another lottery when the small hit game is performed (do not start over from the game of effect image EG5)? You will be able to make a game selection about.

  In the above embodiment, a big hit game is started when the gaming ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, but advantageous control is obtained when the gaming ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. It does not have to necessarily start the big hit game, as long as it is played. For example, based on the fact that the game ball entered into the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted by the V prize opening 1156 while giving the opportunity to enter the prize winning opening 1155 while the big hit game is being played. Processing such as setting and changing the jackpot probability to a higher value may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1 on which the small hit game is installed, when the small hit (or the big hit) is obtained in the short time game state, the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening is promoted. We decided to perform a game preparation effect that would allow the lottery to be put on hold anew. However, for this game preparation effect, in order to obtain an effect such as prompting the game preparation for setting the number of reservations to the upper limit when the big hit game is over, the small hit game You may make it perform in the pachinko machine 1 in which is not mounted. In this case, the game preparation is prompted within the period of the symbol variation of the big hit.

  For example, in the gaming state in which the first special symbol lottery is executed out of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated If it is, it is required to advance the game without interrupting the holding state of the second special symbol lottery which is the side to be preferentially consumed. However, since the time saving function does not operate while the big hit game is being performed, the second special symbol lottery is newly put on hold even if the time saving function is activated in the state immediately after the big hit game is over. It is considered relatively difficult to do. Nevertheless, if there are cases where the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery has not reached the upper limit when the big hit game is over, the second special symbol lottery, which is the side to be prioritized, is suspended Since the state becomes more and more likely to be interrupted, it can be said that it is effective to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game by prompting the above-mentioned preparation for such a gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, when playing a small hit game according to the result of the second special symbol lottery, by actively generating an overflow winning, the upper limit of the game ball that can be winning in the small hit game It becomes possible to add the number of game balls exceeding the value (up to 10) into the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155 regularly, and such excellent winning performance makes it possible for each small hit game described above. Even in the case where the game ball is always guided to the V winning hole 1156 among the restrictions, the machine drawing probability can be set to be lower than approximately 1/10. According to such a configuration, it is desirable in that the machine drawing probability set approximately lower than 1/10 can be realized without necessarily including the small hit in the result of the first special symbol drawing. However, if a small hit is included in the result of the first special symbol lottery, a probability value lower than 1/10 in only the machine lottery probability in the case where a small hit game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery May not necessarily be realized, and a probability value lower than 1/10 may be realized by combining with the machine lottery probability when a small hit game is performed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery . That is, in this case, the machine lottery probability in the case where the small hit game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery can be set to be higher than approximately 1/10.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the game and effect that should normally appear in the withdrawal period after the end of one set of big hit games is advanced within the execution period of one set of jackpot games before the withdrawal period. Although it is made to appear in a certain form, the appearance destination may not be within the execution period of one set of big hit games.

  For example, after a big hit game is executed, regardless of the type of big hit, always make the short time game state occur, and the time until the big hit lottery is digested for the hold upper limit number (4 times) by that time Only generate. Then, the advance effect for the jackpot lottery for the upper limit number of holdings (4 times) that can be digested each time the jackpot game is performed is performed within the execution period of the previous jackpot game. According to the configuration according to such a modification, the period of up to four symbol variations made digestible in the short time gaming state becomes the above-mentioned pullback period.

  In the case of such a modified example, when the time reduction function is operating, the main control MPU 4100a has an upper limit value at which the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested while the time reduction function is operating is predetermined (here, It is judged whether it reached 4 times) (the above-mentioned step S522). And when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol that has been consumed while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value (here four times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the time saving game state is established. , Stop the time saving function (step S523 above). Also, regardless of the type of gaming state when the big hit game occurred, and the type of hit (big hit, small hit), after the big hit game is performed, a time saving game state will be generated.

  According to such a configuration, first, the period during which the big hit game is played is controlled when transitioning from the playing period of the big hit game to the above-mentioned withdrawal period (hourly short game state for the upper limit number of holdings (4 times)). The above-mentioned advance presentation in which the hit of the big hit lottery (the second special symbol lottery) which is in the pending state can be grasped is displayed. Then, although controlled during the pullback period during which the time saving function is activated, this pullback period is immediately ended by the above-described configuration of ultrashortening variation. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game, if you get a big hit (big hit or small hit) in any of the big hit lottery (big hit lottery for up to 4 times) in the holding state of the second special symbol side, the symbol change is It becomes game characteristics as if a big hit game occurred continuously without being performed.

  However, as described above, in the time saving game state, the open extension function is activated before the period controlled as the time saving game state ends (before the end of the maximum number of holds after the end of the big hit game) The starting door member 1214 which has started the operation may maintain its operating state (opened state) until the symbol variation exceeds the above-mentioned upper limit number of holdings controlled as the short time gaming state.

  That is, in this case, even if the period controlled as the time saving game state is set as a period until the pattern variation is absorbed, which is the number of holding upper limit four times after the end of the big hit game, the period is extended beyond the period Since the operation state of the start door member 1214 due to the function appears, there is a concern that the set value or the like of the ball as the pachinko machine 1 is adversely affected.

  Therefore, in this modified example, all of the big hit lottery being held on hold for 4 times (the upper limit for the number of the second special symbol side big hit lottery can be put on hold) at the end of the big hit game ( If the big hit, the second advantageous small hit) is not obtained, the expected value of the number of times the starting opening door member 1214 is operated within the time required for the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) to be saved When it is less than 1 ′ ′, it has a means capable of executing the short invalidation control.

  That is, in this case, in the short game state immediately after the big hit game is over, the operating state of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function is hard to appear beyond the period in which the symbol fluctuation for the upper limit number of holdings (4 times) As a result, it is possible to suppress that the setting value or the like applied to the ball as the pachinko machine 1 is adversely affected.

  In addition, as described above, in the short time gaming state immediately after the big hit game is over, the expected value of the number of times the starting door member 1214 operates until the symbol fluctuation for the upper limit number of holdings (4 times) is digested As control to be less than “1”, probability that the game ball will be accepted by the gate member 1134, hit probability of normal symbol (wining probability of normal hit), variation time of normal symbol in the state where time saving function is not activated, ordinary This can be realized through setting of various parameters such as the waiting time from the end of the fluctuation display of the symbol to the start of the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, the fluctuation pattern (time) of ultrashortening fluctuation, and so on. However, in order to preferably realize such control, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the state where the time saving function is not operating, until the symbol fluctuation for the upper limit number of holdings (for 4 times) is absorbed in the time saving gaming state To be set longer than half the length of time (more preferably, the time until the pattern variation of the upper limit of several minutes (4 times) is digested in the short game state is digested) It is desirable to make it difficult to give lottery symbols of regular symbols within time.

  However, assuming that the above-mentioned time reduction invalidation control is applied as it is, even when the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained in any of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) being put on hold, Because it is difficult to be provided the opportunity to receive the game ball to the second starting opening 1153, there is no opportunity to put the big hit lottery (the second special symbol lottery) a new holding status, and the big hit that has already been put on hold It is feared that it will be difficult to continuously generate a big hit game the number of times greater than the number of lottery (second special symbol lottery).

  On the other hand, when a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained in any of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) being put on hold at the end of the big hit game, the operation of the start door member 1214 Regardless of the situation that it takes to receive the game ball to the second starting opening 1153, the control (the process during the fluctuation) concerning the symbol fluctuation is obtained when the corresponding (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained There is a fact that no more symbol variation than the above-mentioned upper limit of the number of reservations is digested since it is finished and it shifts to control to generate big hit game or small hit game (big hit game start processing or small hit game processing) is there.

  In this respect, in the above configuration, when the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained in any of the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) which is put on hold at the end of the big hit game, the above-mentioned holding upper limit The jackpot lottery (second special symbol lottery) hits the jackpot (big hit, second) in view of the fact that the operating state of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function does not appear beyond the period when the symbol variation for several minutes is absorbed During the period from the start of symbol variation, which is an advantageous small hit), to the occurrence of a big hit game according to the subject, control is provided to allow an operation opportunity of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function.

  According to such a configuration, the number of times the starting opening door member 1214 operates from the start of the symbol variation to be hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to the occurrence of a big hit game according to the corresponding The expected value of “1” or more, and if a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained in any of the held big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery), time-saving game state Every time transition control is performed, an opportunity to receive the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 can be provided. Therefore, in combination with the above-mentioned configuration according to the time reduction invalidation control, when the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is obtained in any of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) being put on hold status As long as it is, it will be possible to realize a novel game characteristic as if the function as the time-saving game state works.

  In addition, the second special symbol lottery in the short time game state immediately after the end of the big hit game is hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) until the big hit game according to the corresponding occurrence is started Also for control to set the expected value of the number of times the start door member 1214 is operated to “1” or more, the probability that the game ball is accepted by the gate member 1134 as in the control to make less than “1” described above The probability of winning (ordinary winning probability), the variation time of the normal symbol when the time saving function is not operating, the waiting time from the end of the variation display of the normal symbol to the start of operation of the starting opening door member 1214, It can be realized through the setting of various parameters such as shortening fluctuation pattern (time), etc. However, in order to preferably realize such control, the variation time of the special symbol in the case where the second special symbol lottery is hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit), the time when the time saving function is not operating normally It is desirable to set a time longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol so that a lottery chance of the normal symbol is easily provided within the time until the digestion.

  However, when winning a small hit as a result of the second special symbol lottery, in the period before the big hit game occurs, the period of the small hit interval as a period when entering the second starting opening 1153 is made easy It is set. Therefore, as for the pattern variation at the time of small hit, the variation pattern (time) of the ultra-shortened variation may be used as the variation pattern, whereby the second special symbol lottery is preferably maintained in the pending state. There is no problem.

  By the way, in pachinko machine 1 where only the number of big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) in such a holding state is given a chance of pulling back, hit is obtained in any of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state Depending on the presence or absence, the degree of advantage of the gaming situation in the next withdrawal period will change.

  For example, at the end of the jackpot game, of the second special symbol lottery in the four pending state, the second special symbol lottery that is the first to be digested is obtained in the second to fourth while it is hit It is assumed that a situation occurs in which a hit is not obtained in the second special symbol lottery to be digested. Then, after the end of the big hit game, during the process of the first second special symbol lottery, since the opportunity to receive the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 can be provided, the second special symbol lottery You have the opportunity to put one on hold. However, in this case, the game will be shifted to the next pullback period with the three big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) which is a loss being left in the hold state, and the gaming situation is relatively disadvantageous for the player. .

  On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game, among the second special symbol lottery in the four pending state, the hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery that is the fourth to be digested, It is assumed that a situation occurs in which a hit is not obtained in the second special symbol lottery to be digested second. Then, after the end of the big hit game, during the process of the fourth second special symbol lottery, since the opportunity to receive the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 can be provided, the second special symbol lottery You have the opportunity to put four on hold. That is, in this case, since the player is transferred to the next pullback period without leaving one big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) which is a loss, the gaming situation is relatively advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 according to this modification is, when performing the loop challenge effect as the forward moving effect, the second special symbol lottery obtained in the hit is digested among the big win lottery in the pending state. The information on whether or not the character is managed (acquired, stored, updated), and the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned forward moving effect is selected based on the information. This makes it possible to indicate the degree of advantage that changes in accordance with the order in which the second special symbol lottery obtained for the hit is digested in the above-described forward moving effect.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, as described above, the start opening door member 1214 operates within the time required for the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) for the upper limit number of holdings in the pullback period. Control (time reduction invalidation control) is performed so that the expected value of the number of times is less than “1”, but even if such control is performed, the period during which the symbol variation corresponding to the number of upper limit for storage is digested Beyond that, it may happen that the open extension function causes the operating state of the start door member 1214 to appear.

  Therefore, for example, after the end of the big hit game, if the operating state of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function appears beyond the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit for storage is digested, the second start opening 1153 It is possible to make it possible to grasp that the player can enter the ball by means of an effect (for example, an extra chance, etc.) and to produce a surprise for the player. That is, in this case, if entering the second starting opening 1153 occurs during the production of such extra chance, as in the case of the pullback period, a small hit will be obtained with a high probability of 1/6, It will be possible to improve the game interest.

  In addition, the number of times of the symbol variation controlled to the time saving gaming state may not be the same as the number of holding upper limit, and may be within the number of holding upper limit. For example, each time a big hit is obtained, if it is possible to change within the upper limit number of holdings, the opportunity to carry out a maximum of 4 big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) being held under favorable conditions is Although granted, even if a hit is obtained, it will not necessarily be possible to put the big hit lottery (second special symbol lottery) anew on hold by the time saving function, and such a game feature will make the game entertaining It will be possible to improve.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment and its modified example, four balls (the second special symbol lottery that is digested in the above-mentioned pullback period) is taken as one open time of the start door member 1214 by the open extension function. It is desirable that the upper limit number of holdings) set the time that can enter the ball.

[Reexplained about the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155]
The game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is sent to the upper opening 1238b side opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body When the receiving portion 1236a of 1236 is positioned at the storage position facing upward, the gaming ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and the rotating body 1236 is rotated and received in that state. When the part 1236a is turned to the discharge position facing the right, the gaming ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V prize opening 1156, and a bonus (big hit game different from the prize winning opening 1155) ), And the player can be entertained by the provided benefit, and the V winning hole 115 via the receiver 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Since a bonus is given when the game ball T is accepted, the player is sloppy or not by whether the game ball T accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 or not. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the V winning hole 1156 and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  When the rotating body 1236 rotates the plunger 1232 a of the V prize solenoid 1232, the entire driving gear member 1233 is a shaft by the engaging portion 1233 d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232 a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 which rotates around 1233a and engages with the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the drive gear member 1233 rotates in the direction opposite to the drive gear member 1233. As the driven gear member 1234 pivots, the rotor 1236 pivots between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotational speed of the rotary body 1236 is faster than when the motor is rotated by a motor as in a conventional pachinko machine, so the player can play the game ball T on the receiver 1236a of the rotary body 1236. Even if it is going to take the timing of hitting of the game ball T so that it is accommodated, it is possible to make the timing difficult. Therefore, it is difficult to accommodate the gaming ball T in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so that it is difficult to accept the gaming ball T to the V winning opening 1156, and the benefit of receiving the V winning opening 1156 It is possible to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the grant.

  Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (the rotating body 1236) should be larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. As compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, as the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 is increased, the timing is taken even if the player attempts to hit the game ball T so that the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It can be difficult.

  Furthermore, behind the upper opening 1238b, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided with a losing hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T that has circulated from the prize winning opening 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when other than the accommodation position. The game balls T can be prevented from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the prize winning opening 1155. Therefore, even if the game ball T is made to enter the prize winning opening 1155 due to some injustice, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the receiver 1236a if the receiver 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is other than the accommodation position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given illegally, and to reduce an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to a fraud. Particularly, in the present embodiment, in the normal state where the prize winning opening 1155 can not be received, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is pivoted to the V prize opening 1156 side coincident with the right portion opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is made to enter the prize winning opening 1155, it can be recognized at first glance that the game ball T can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so it is illegal. It is possible to forgive the act and to prevent the act of fraud.

  Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than in the past, even if it is considered that the game ball T is illegally accepted into the V winning hole 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236) By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it can be recognized that it is difficult for the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 to receive a seemingly illegal game ball T, making it possible to discourage fraudulent acts and cheating The pachinko machine 1 can have high deterrence against In addition, since it is possible to prevent fraud, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a when the receiving portion 1236a opened on the outer peripheral side is rotated from the housing position to the release position. Since the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a between the storage position and the discharging position even if the centrifugal force by the rotation acts on the gaming ball T from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force It is possible to prevent the game balls T from jumping out, and the game balls T can be reliably moved to the release position. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game ball T from jumping out of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 in rotation by the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be made faster, A pachinko machine 1 can be provided which makes it difficult to take timing of the body 1236 and reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is changed according to the game state which changes as the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. The prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize unit 1220 can move, and the prize winning opening 1155 can receive the game ball T according to the special lottery result which is drawn by acceptance of In the state, when the game ball T is accepted into the prize winning opening 1155, a bonus such as payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls T is awarded, so the gaming ball T aimed at the prize winning opening 1155 to the player Can be entertained by performing the When the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 with the aim of the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted by the prize winning opening 1155, a privilege is awarded, and the player is further enjoyed by the privilege given. Can. The game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is guided to the upper opening 1238 b formed at the upper portion of the peripheral wall 1238 a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238 e of the V winning opening unit 1220 B , And contacts the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b. At this time, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, when the receiving portion 1236a matches the right part opening 1238c, From the receiver 1236a through the right part opening 1238c, it enters into the right guiding part 1238f, is guided by the right guiding part 1238f, is accepted by the V prize opening 1156, is granted a bonus such as a big hit game, and is granted by the granted benefit It is possible to further entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest. Since only one receiving portion 1236a is provided on this rotating body 1236, there is a loss which is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 as compared with the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in a conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 is such that it is easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for a beginner or a player who is not accustomed to the operation of hitting the game ball T because there is no receiving portion 1236a. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and the game with the pachinko machine 1 can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. can do.

  In addition, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game balls T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, compared with the case where a plurality of receiving portions are provided on the rotating body as in the related art, The outer diameter can be reduced, and the space for arranging the rotary body 1236 can be easily secured in the game area 1100, and the rotational freedom of the rotary body 1236 can be increased to effectively arrange the rotary body 1236. It can be arranged. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end face of the rotating body 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is Even if the size is smaller than the conventional one, it can be avoided that the rotating body 1236 (the receiving unit 1236a) becomes hard to see, and it is possible to suppress the enjoyment decline due to enjoying the game by the rotating body 1236.

  Furthermore, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized such that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e behind the upper opening 1238b. And the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is in alignment with the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T which has flowed down through the upper opening 1238b is reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a. Even if another game ball T from above the game ball T received by the receiver 1236a abuts, another game ball T received by the receiver 1236a abuts with another game ball T It is possible to suppress dropping off from the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is surely made to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. It can be sent.

  In addition, since the back hole of the upper opening 1238b is provided with the missing hole 1230c communicating with the upper guiding portion 1238e and the second discharge path 1230e, in a state where the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not coincide with the upper opening 1238b, Even if the game ball T flows down from the side of the prize winning opening 1155 and abuts on the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. . On the other hand, in a state where the game ball T has already been received by the receiver 1236a after the receiver 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, another game ball T flows down from the prize winning opening 1155 side Even if the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a through the upper opening 1238b is abutted from the upper side, another game ball T coming from behind is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received by the prize winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V winning hole 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is to be noted that one of the plurality of game balls T accepted by the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 and accepted by the V prize opening 1156 to receive a benefit, so that the rotating body 1236 Even if there is a game ball T which is discharged from the hole 1230c without being received by the receiving portion 1236a, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest Can.

  In addition, since the game balls T that can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 are discharged to the rear side of the rotating body 1236 from the lost holes 1230c, the game can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the left and right of the rotating body 1236, the size of the front view of the V winning opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in arranging the rotary body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, and therefore, the rotary body 1236 can be arranged at an effective location in the game area 1100 and the player can easily see the rotary body 1236. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game by the rotating body 1236 and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238 b is formed slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game balls T, and from the center of the game balls T received by the receiving portion 1236 a Since another gaming ball T coming from behind comes in contact with the slightly backward position, the gaming machine ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the upper opening through the upper guiding portion 1238e When another game ball T from 1238b abuts on the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a from above, guiding the other game ball T contacted from above to the rear with the lost hole 1230c. It is possible to reliably discharge another gaming ball T coming from behind through the second hole 1230 e from the lost hole 1230 c through the second discharge path 1230 e.

  In addition, another gaming ball T coming from behind comes in contact with a position slightly behind the center of the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so the game received by the receiving portion 1236a A force acts on the ball T so as to be pushed forward on the opposite side to the missing hole 1230c, so that it is difficult for the ball T to drop off to the missing hole 1230c side, and the state of being received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 dropping out and losing the opportunity to be accepted into the V prize hole 1156, The game ball T accepted by the receiving portion 1236a can be reliably accepted to the V prize winning opening 1156, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the front side (inner side) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a in the rotating body 1236, there is provided an inclined portion 1236b which is inclined obliquely backward as it goes upward (away from the rotation center) By forming the center of the upper opening 1238b slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a that receives the game balls T, the gaming ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Since the gaming ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, when the gaming ball T flows down from the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T contacts the inclined portion 1236, and the gaming ball T is moved by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be guided forward to be easily received into the receiving portion 1236a. When the gaming ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the gaming ball T first contacts the inclined portion 1236b and abuts against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, thereby alleviating an impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The rotor 1236 can be made more difficult to break, and the flow speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a to abut against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made hard to bounce, and the gaming ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238 e is bent in a crank shape, the flow speed of the gaming ball T being guided by the upper guiding portion 1238 e can be attenuated. Therefore, even if another gaming ball T, which has flowed through the upper guiding portion 1238e, abuts on the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the flow speed can be increased by circulating the upper guiding portion 1238e. Is attenuated, the impact due to contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a bounces from the receiving portion 1236a This can be made difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a to drop out of the receiving portion 1236a.

  Furthermore, the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, and the flow speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e, so the gaming ball T received by the prize winning opening 1155 is the upper guidance. The shock acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced even when it circulates through the portion 1238e and contacts (contacts) the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper port 1238b, and the contact of the game ball T It is possible to prevent the rotor 1236 from being easily damaged by an impact due to the Therefore, the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the rotating body 1236 can prevent the player from feeling frustrated and reducing the interest in the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player. Can.

  In addition, in order to receive the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 through the rotating body 1236, the winning opening / closing member 1221 needs to be opened and the winning opening 1155 can be received. An opportunity to receive the ball T into the V winning opening 1156 (the prize winning opening 1155) can be limited, and a premium feeling can be given to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, according to the game state, when the winning combination 1155 can be accepted, the opportunity to receive the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 is obtained, so the winning combination 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning opening 1156 The player can be made to pay attention to the player etc., and the feeling of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the V winning hole 1156 can be enhanced, and the game ball T hitting the prize winning hole 1155 is made to the player. The operation can be actively performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[Reexplained about the second start port 1153 and the start port door member 1214]
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable starting opening unit 1210, the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 extends laterally to guide the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 disposed on the right end side. Of the slider portion 1214g of the start opening door member 1214 on the left side of the second start opening 1153, after making the heights of the first guide 1214a, the second guide 1214b, and the third guide 1214c different from each other possible. Attach the start opening solenoid 1215 to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the opposite side to the left and right with the second start opening 1153 on the upper side and on the rear side of the first guide 1214a and the second guide 1214b. The game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the starting opening solenoid 1215 The lower case 1211 is slidably supported by the lower case 1211 to advance and retract the movable plunger 1215a according to the changing gaming state (according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134). Since the start opening door member 1214 is made to slide back and forth by transmitting to the start opening door member 1214, the front and back and upper and lower dimensions of the mechanism (variable start opening unit 1210) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 Can be smaller than conventional ones. Therefore, since the installation space for providing the variable start opening unit 1210 having the start opening door member 1214 which slides back and forth according to the gaming state can be reduced, the start opening door sliding back and forth in the game area 1100 The arrangement freedom of the member 1214 can be enhanced, and the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be largely changed by arranging the starting opening door member 1214 at a place where it has not been possible to arrange in the past pachinko machine Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal for the player who wants to strongly select the player as a pachinko machine that attracts the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable starting opening unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable starting opening unit 1210 having the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, And since it becomes possible to equip other members with the pachinko machine 1 without problems, without pressing other members such as character and the like, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the decorative effect and the rendering effect by the other members. Thus, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal of the player.

  Furthermore, while arranging the second start opening 1153 on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, the first guide 1214a, the second guide 1214b and the third guide extending to the left and right of the start opening door member 1214 Since the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by 1214 c, when the starting opening door member 1214 is protruded into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the first guidance of the starting opening door member 1214 When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c, and is accepted by the second starting opening 1153. By rolling the game ball T toward the second starting opening 1153 on the first guide portion 1214 a, the second guide portion 1214 b and the third guide portion 1214 c. It can cause increased expectations for acceptance into the second start hole 1153 with respect to the technique's interest and to entertain the player can be suppressed. At this time, when the starting opening door member 1214 sliding forward and backward slides the gaming ball T to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the third guiding portion 1214c. Since the action of the starting opening door member 1214 is opposite to that of a conventional pachinko machine variable receiving port (variable winning hole), a strong impact may be given to a player or the like who is used to the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal.

  Further, in a state where the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 are slid forward and projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end side, so it is possible to roll over the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c which extend to the left and right. The player can be made to show the movement of the moving game ball T, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the third guiding portion 1214c. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, when the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is advanced and retracted to the left and right according to the gaming state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a is moved to the left and right with the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1215a. The body part 1216a also extends vertically through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging part 1216c and the main body part 1216a so as to revolve around an axis extending vertically about the main body part 1216a so as to move. It will turn around the axis. A connection hole 1216e at the end of the second piece 1216d extending at a right angle to the first piece 1216b from the main body 1216a is engaged with and coupled to a connection pin 1214h projecting from the slider portion 1214g of the start opening door member 1214 Therefore, the connection hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves up and down around the axis when the main body 1216a rotates, and the connection hole 1216e revolves through the connection pin 1214h and the slider 1214g. As a result, the start opening door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, forward / backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 can be transmitted to reliably slide the starting opening door member 1214 back and forth, thereby reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects. be able to.

  Further, since the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length extending to the slider portion 1214g on the lower side of the starting opening solenoid 1215 of the starting opening door member 1214 and is shorter than in the prior art, the starting opening door member is relatively The sliding range before and after 1214 can be narrowed, and the dimensions before and after can be made smaller than before. In addition, since the link member 1216 is rotated about the vertically extending axis, the size of the upper and lower portions is smaller than in the conventional case where it is rotated about the axially extending axis. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable start opening unit 1210) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 can be realized that reliably exerts the above-described effects. it can.

  In addition, since the gaming ball T received in the second starting opening 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 through the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 The lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 are provided with a passage member or the like for receiving the game ball T received by the second starting opening 1153 on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 as compared with the case where they are guided and released. There is no need to make it easy to secure a space behind the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and a character on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210. Thus, it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 1100, even when the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is in the non-acceptable position retracted backward, the second starting opening 1153 is inside the gaming area 1100. And the second starting opening 1153 is not closed, so that the player can have an illusion that the game ball T can be received by the second starting opening 1153. Of the second start port 1153. Therefore, since the second starting opening 1153 is always open, it is possible to make the player direct attention to the second starting opening 1153 regardless of the movement (slide) of the starting opening door member 1214, and thus the player In addition, it is possible to make it hard to get bored by having a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 and making the second starting opening 1153 for the player regardless of the position of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to perform a hitting operation of the game ball T aiming for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the interest in the game.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the starting opening door member 1214 is positioned at any of the forwardly receivable position and the backward retreating position, When viewed from the front, since it looks the same, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the position of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, since the position of the starting opening door member 1214 is hard to be understood, the player can be illusiveed that the starting opening door member 1214 is in the acceptable position projecting forward, and the player aims the starting opening door member 1214 It is possible to make the game ball T be hit and entertained.

  In addition, as described above, since it is possible to reduce that the game ball T is additionally received, the special lottery result in which the advantageous game state is generated by the game ball T additionally received to the second starting opening 1153 is a lottery It can be avoided that it is done, and it can control that the burden on the game hall side increases.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down the second start opening 1153, the second start opening 1153 flows The second starting opening upper shelf 1161j prevents the game ball T from being directly received by the second starting opening 1153 because the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is disposed below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j of the path forming member 1161. The second start opening upper shelf 1161 j is discharged downward from the left end. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extends in the left and right direction (according to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134) in accordance with the game state which changes as the game ball T is hit into the game area 100. The game ball T discharged downward from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j in a state of sliding forward in the game area 1100 is a second starting opening in a plan view of the starting opening door member 1214. When flowing down to the left outer part of the upper shelf 1161 j, the gaming ball T rolls on the starting opening door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting opening 1153 and is received by the second starting opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153, a benefit such as a payout of the game ball T or a lottery of a special lottery result is given, so that the player can be entertained by the given benefit. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the start opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T can be received into the second start opening 1153.

  The left and right starting opening door member 1214 slides in the front and rear direction different from the acceptable direction of the second starting opening 1153 facing the left direction of the gaming ball T, and the starting opening in the game area 1100 When the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214 when sliding the door member 1214 from the protruding state to the non-projecting state (immersed state), the gaming ball T is flat on the starting opening door member 1214 Since it takes a certain amount of time from the left outside of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second starting opening 1153 visually, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214 And the game ball T falls from the starting opening door member 1214 without being received by the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted and retracted between That. More specifically, while the gaming ball T is rolling rightward toward the second starting opening 1153, the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, whereby the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 on which the gaming ball T is placed is The size gradually decreases, and before the gaming ball T reaches the second starting opening 1153, it will drop off from the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, since it is possible to reduce that the gaming ball T is excessively received to the second starting opening 1153, a benefit (in particular, unnecessary) due to the reception of the gaming ball T to the extra second starting opening 1153 It is possible to reduce the award of the special lottery result in which the advantageous gaming state occurs, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  When the game ball T flows down onto the start opening door member 1214 when the start opening door member 1214 slides forward so as to protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T is moved by the start opening door member 1214. It may be guided to the second starting port 1153 and accepted. However, since the starting opening door member 1214 slides according to the gaming state, it is difficult to know the timing at which the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the gaming area 1100, and the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the gaming area 1100. Since the player must hit the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 after confirming that it has protruded, the starting opening door member 1214 slides so as to protrude into the game area 1100. During this time, the possibility of the game ball T flowing down onto the starting opening door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214, it acts on the starting opening door member 1214 by the abutment of the game ball T. A drive mechanism (start opening solenoid 1215 for sliding the start opening door member 1214 only by the impact acting on the slide groove 1211 d in the lower case 1211 of the variable start opening unit 1210 slidably supporting the start opening door member 1214 And the link member 1216), which hardly causes damage to the start opening door member 1214 or the like (variable start opening unit 1210).

  Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 is short as compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, since the time from the state where the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 to the retraction and insertion can be shortened, the gaming ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214 It is possible to immerse the starting opening door member 1214 before it is made and to make it difficult for the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. In addition, since the starting opening door member 214 is slid in the front-rear direction, a space for inserting the starting opening door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding are disposed behind the game area 1100. The inside of the game area 1100 is not compressed by the mechanism (the start opening solenoid 1215, the link member 1216, etc.) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 so that the inside of the play area 1100 can be used as wide as possible Can.

  Further, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening door member 1214 is formed flat without a protrusion, the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100. Even when the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214 when sliding it back so as to immerse from the set state, the game ball T is pulled to the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the projection and the starting opening door The game ball T can be dropped smoothly from the top of the starting opening door member 1214 without difficulty of falling from the member 1214 or without the gaming ball T jumping up to the second starting opening 1153 by the projection, as described above. It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects.

  Furthermore, the game ball T can be received from the left direction with respect to the second start opening 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the start opening door member 1214 extending left and right enters the second start opening 1153 as it is Therefore, it can be made easy for the player to recognize that when the gaming ball T is guided to the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening 1153 can be reliably received. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, it is possible to make sure that the second starting opening 1153 is accepted if the game ball T is made to flow down the starting opening door member 1214 As a result, it is possible to positively perform the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the starting opening door member 1214 is caused to slide in and out of the game area 1100 by advancing and retracting the plunger 1215 a which is moved by energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215, so that the starting opening door member 1214 is The sliding speed of the starting opening door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration as compared with the case where the motor is made to slide. Therefore, since the starting opening door member 1214 can be slid quickly, the starting opening door member 1214 can be moved to the game area 1100 while the gaming ball T on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153. It is possible to retract from the inside, and it is possible to reliably reduce that the extra game ball T is received into the second starting opening 1153, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes as the game ball T is hit into the game area 110 by the operation of the player. The game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is the first one of the front flow path forming member 1161 when the start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the normal lottery result. When it flows down to the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls to the left by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and when discharged from the left end side, it flows down to the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. , The first opening 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 located below between the second starting opening region left upright wall portion 1161m and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and the starting opening Distributed in the U-turn shape by being guided to the right on the side opposite to the left along the member 1214, and thus acceptable to the second start hole 1153. Then, when the game ball T is accepted by the second starting opening 1153, the payout of the game ball T and the drawing of the special lottery result are performed as a benefit, so that the player can be entertained by the benefit and the game ball is It is possible to enjoy the hitting operation (right-handed hitting) of the game ball T aiming at the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j so that T can be received to the second start opening 1153. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 is bent obliquely to the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 below between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, the player can see the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 side when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be made to recognize, and it can make the expectation for acceptance of game ball T to the 2nd starting opening 1153 increase. Further, in the start opening door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second start opening 1153 and the second guide portion 1214b close to the second start opening 1153 have different inclination angles, and the first guide portion Since the acceleration of the game ball T is fast in 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow in the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the portion where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the rolling speed of the game ball T which has not changed on the starting opening door member changes, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, making it difficult for the player to get bored. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes and differs between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting opening door member 1214, it rolls on the starting opening door member 1214. The player can strongly draw the attention of the player to the playing ball T, and can make it pay attention, and by making the game ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 pay attention, the starting opening door member 1214 Thus, the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 where the game ball T is guided can be enhanced.

  In addition, the first guiding portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the gaming ball T abuts on the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above, it feels ugly Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so it becomes possible to distribute the game ball T along the start opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right. The game ball T can be moved as intended on the starting opening door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T is hit from above with respect to the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. In the game state, it is possible to cause the player to recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214 a is reflected to the right with the second start port 1153 when it is touched. In response, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the second starting opening 1153 can receive the gaming ball T when the gaming ball T is allowed to flow down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be done. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the player is aggressively hit the game ball T aiming at the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to make the player entertain and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed within a range of 0.2 times to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T can be made by the first guide portion 1214a. Can be reliably guided to the second starting opening 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be made easy to see by suppressing the rolling speed of the game ball T becoming faster than necessary. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game medium and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the left and right length of the starting opening door member 1214 in plan view is formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 Allows the player to appropriately show the gaming ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 toward the second starting opening 1153 without excess or deficiency, and enjoys the movement of the impacting gaming ball T. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movement of the game ball T and to prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  In addition, when the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the gaming area 1100 when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the gaming area 1100 according to the gaming state, the starting opening door The game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second start opening 1153, that is, to the first guide portion 1214a side, so the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the start opening door member 1214 Flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the start opening door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T by the start opening door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a It is possible to make sure that the game is shown, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed immediately above the starting opening door member 1214 so as to circulate the gaming ball T in a U-turn shape, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j becomes the starting opening door member 1214 As compared with the case where the game ball T is distributed in a crank shape by disposing the game ball T at a position on the left outside of the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the top of the The space in the left-right direction occupied by the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161 j and the like can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be arranged in the game area 1100 in a place easy for the player to see. The pachinko machine 1 to play can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the gaming area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second starting opening area standing wall portion 1161m extends vertically to the left outside of the first guiding portion 1214a. Before the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j flows down on the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening area left upright wall portion 1161m is brought into contact with the left guiding wall 1214a. The game ball T can be reliably flowed down onto the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second can be prevented. When the game ball T which has flowed down between the starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214 a) and bounces, the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m plays a game T can be reliably prevented from flowing to the side opposite to the second start opening 1153 side, and the game ball T can be reliably guided to the second start opening 1153 by the start opening door member 1214 .

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down to the upper side of the second starting opening 1153 opened forward, the second The second start opening upper shelf 1161j contacts the second start opening upper shelf 1161j directly above the start opening 1153 and rolls leftward from the position immediately above the second start opening 1153 by the second start opening upper shelf 1161j according to the inclination of the upper surface It is discharged from the left end side distant from the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and comes into contact with the second starting opening area left upright wall portion 1161 m. At this time, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, whereby the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. The game ball T released from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and in contact with the second start opening area left upright wall 1161 m abuts on the start opening door member 1214 and the start opening door member 1214 It is guided to the front side of the second start opening 1153 and is received in the second start opening 1153. At this time, since the second start opening region right upright wall portion 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second start opening 1153 on the same side as the side where the second start opening upper shelf 1161j is high. Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second start opening 1153 by the start opening door member 1214 passes by the front side of the second start opening 1153, it passes in contact with the second start opening area right upright wall portion 1161k The game ball T guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is received into the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, a benefit such as a payout of the game ball T or a lottery result of a special lottery result is provided, and the player can be entertained by the given benefit. In order to receive the game ball T into the second start hole 1153, it is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the second start hole 1153. Then, before the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153, the game ball T abuts on the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, the second start opening area left upright wall 1161m, and the start opening door member 1214. Thus, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T whose movement direction is a U-turn and the distribution direction changes rapidly, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Also, as described above, when the gaming ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j while the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T makes a U-turn as described above. Therefore, when the distribution direction of the game balls T changes by 180 degrees, the distribution speed of the game balls T becomes relatively slow. Therefore, it becomes easy to see the movement of the game ball T circulating in a U-turn shape, so it is easy for the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes in the gaming area 1100, in a state where the gaming ball T circulates in a U-turn shape and the starting opening door member 1214 does not protrude in the gaming area 1100, the gaming ball T Is circulated in an inverted L-shape, so that even if the game ball T is made to flow down to the same second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j according to the projection of the start opening door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T is differentiated. be able to. Therefore, the movement (flow) of the gaming ball T changes according to the gaming state (in response to the passage of the gate member 1134 by the gaming ball T), so the gaming ball T of various movements is shown to the player It can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to decrease the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 arranged at the top and bottom, only one game ball T can be circulated, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening Since the space between the top and bottom of the door member 1214 is narrowed as much as possible, the game ball T flowing from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second start opening left upright wall portion 1161 m and flowing onto the start opening door member 1214 The motion of the player can be made to make a U-turn motion rapidly, so the player can be entertained by the motion of the game ball T which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game is entertaining It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is longer than the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j in the left and right direction, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161 j, the starting opening door member 1214 is easily noticeable, and the player can be strongly attracted to the protruding starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, by causing the player to pay attention to the starting opening door member 1214 when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j near the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m The game ball T rolling on the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j and the start opening door member 1214 can be reliably viewed, and moves in a U-turn shape. The movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed, and the game ball T is aimed at the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j so that the game ball T circulates on the start opening door member 1214 for the player. An operation can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T is circulated on the starting opening door member 1214 via the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m while the starting opening door member 1214 is projecting, the second Since it is guided to the starting opening 1153 and accepted in the second starting opening 1153, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes according to the gaming state, the game ball T for the starting opening door member 1214 for the player It is possible to actively perform a hitting operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161 j to send the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the game ball T struck into the game area 1100 aiming at the second start opening 1153 flows down on the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j, it rolls in the left direction away from the second start opening 1153. The game ball T can be made to feel disappointing to the player by moving away from the second starting opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is released from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j, if the start opening door member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T separated from the second start opening 1153 is moved by the start opening door member 1214. It rolls in the right direction approaching the second start opening 1153. That is, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and comes back to the second start opening 1153, the player can be pleased and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the second start opening 1153 is enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the second start opening region right standing wall portion 1161k extending up and down to the second start opening upper shelf 1161j is provided on the right outside of the second start opening 1153, the second start opening upper shelf extending to the left and right Even when trying to receive the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of the 1161 j is high to the second starting opening 1153 arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, from the right outside of the second starting opening 1153 The second starting opening region right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received in the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, in order to allow the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T, it is necessary to allow the game ball T to flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is lowered. It is possible to urge the player to perform an operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the top of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the game ball T is made by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m, and the starting opening door member 1214. Since the user is guided in the direction of the second start opening 1153 by making a U-turn, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball T circulating in a swirling manner, and a sense of expectation for acceptance of the game ball T into the second start opening 1153 Can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state is changed by the hit game ball T, and the game state is changed. In response, the start opening door member 1214 which extends in the lateral direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 slides forward and protrudes into the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, a second start opening right upright wall portion 1161k projecting forward on the right side of the second start opening 1153 is disposed, and a second start opening right is positioned above the second start opening 1153. A second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 so that the left side is lower from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k is arranged, and the starting opening door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When projecting inward, the left end of the starting opening door member 1214 extends outside the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, it rolls over the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j toward the left end and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the gaming ball T will be received on the starting opening door member 1214 with a very high probability. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the upper side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 and the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T is made to flow down, the game ball T is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, the gaming ball T received on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, and the third guiding portion 1214c. When the start opening 1153 is accepted, a payout of the game ball T or a lottery of a special lottery result is performed as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extends in the lateral direction so as to be able to receive the plurality of gaming balls T in the lateral direction (approximately four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T), It becomes possible for the player to illusion that many gaming balls T can be received into the second starting opening 1153. More specifically, when the player gets used to playing with a conventional pachinko machine having an opening and closing member extending to the left and right, interest in the size of the opening and closing member extending to the left and right becomes stronger, corresponding to the opening and closing member As for the size of a certain entrance (for example, a big winning opening), the interest becomes relatively weak. That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening and closing member is in the left and right direction, the more game balls T can be received. Therefore, it recognizes that the starting opening door member 1214 which protrudes in the game area 1100 and extends to the left and right according to the gaming state is the opening and closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the starting opening door member 1214 is elongated in the left and right Because of that, it will be illusive that it can accept many game balls T. Then, the player can make the hitting operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 by the illusion of the player be actively performed, thereby making the player entertain and suppressing the decrease in interest it can. On the other hand, since the second starting opening 1153 where the gaming ball T is guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is actually formed in a size that only one gaming ball T can be received, on the starting opening door member 1214 Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they can not be accepted at one time and can only be accepted one by one. Therefore, the number of accepted game balls T per hour can be reduced compared to the prior art, and the benefit to be granted is By relatively reducing the amount, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In addition, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received by the second starting opening 1153 even when aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j in addition to the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed above the starting opening door member 1214 (second starting opening 1153), substantially the entire length of the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is It can be made to be the same as having received the game ball T across, and by putting many game balls T, a player can be entertained. At this time, a plurality of gaming balls T exist simultaneously on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j because the lower end of the left side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Even if it is one by one, it will be delivered on the starting opening door member 1214 and guided to the second starting opening 1153, and it can be made to avoid that many gaming balls T are accepted into the second starting opening 1153 at one time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second start opening right upright wall 1161 k protruding into the game area 1100 are provided on the upper side and the right side of the second start opening 1153, the game is performed by the start opening door member 1214 If the ball T is not guided to the second start opening 1153, it is difficult to cause the second start opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. Therefore, since the game ball T can not be received by the second starting opening 1153 unless the starting opening door member 1214 is protruded, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by the opening of the starting opening door member 1214. The protrusion of the starting opening door member 1214 can make the player think that there is something good to be done, and the player's expectation for the game is enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest Can.

  Furthermore, since the upright wall portion 1214 e extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214 c of the start opening door member 1214 is provided, the first guide portion inclined so that the right side of the start opening door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided to the front side of the second starting opening 1153 by the 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b abuts the front wall of the second starting opening 1153 by contacting the standing wall portion 1214e, and further to the right It can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes in the game area 1100 to the right of the second starting opening 1153, so this second starting opening The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the gaming ball T received by the starting opening door member 1214 can be reliably guided to and received by the second starting opening 1153.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to project into the game area 1100, many games are performed as compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is rotated and protruded. It can reduce that the starting opening door member 1214 is easy to be damaged by the impact by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the starting opening door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left and right direction and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the starting opening door member protrudes It is difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side of the starting opening door member and to sufficiently counteract the impact of receiving many game balls T. There is a risk that On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side can be made longer than the portion of the starting opening door member 1214 that protrudes into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact of receiving many game balls T.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to project into the game area 1100, when the game ball T is present on the starting opening door member 1214, the starting opening door member 1214 slides rearward. Then, depending on the position of the gaming ball T on the starting opening door member 1214, the gaming ball T falls off from the starting opening door member 1214 before being guided to the second starting opening 1153, and the second starting opening 1153 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted excessively and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player include a plurality of obstacle nails G disposed in the game area 1100, a windmill, and a center product. By coming into contact with 1130, the winning opening unit 1150, etc., it will be distributed while moving in various directions, and the player can be entertained by making the game ball T move in various ways. In this normal state, the gaming ball T is less likely to circulate immediately below the obstacle nail G or the like on which the gaming ball T abuts, so that the gaming ball T is likely to circulate in the gaming area 1100 A (first area) and an area which is difficult to circulate are formed. Therefore, the game ball T can not be received by the second starting opening 1153 disposed below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j disposed on the downstream side according to the detection of the passed game ball T. The second starting opening upper shelf which is outside the area where the game ball T is easy to circulate and the start hole door member 1214 of the second moving forward appears in the area (first area) where the game ball T in the game area 1100 is easy to The area (second area) in which the game balls T are easily distributed is formed in the area where the game balls T on the lower side of the section 1161 j are not easily distributed. Therefore, the distribution path of the game ball T changes due to the appearance of the start opening door member 1214, and in the normal state, the game ball T can be distributed to the area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game balls T circulating in the unseen region (second region), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the player's interest.

  In addition, when the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 is guided by the start opening door member 1214 when the start opening door member 1214 appears to be advanced, the second start opening 1153 is accepted with extremely high probability. When the game ball T is accepted to the second start opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a benefit, and a lottery of special lottery results in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, etc. are performed. Operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 can be positively performed for the player, and the player is enjoyed the operation of the game ball T to suppress the decrease in interest can do.

  Furthermore, the second starting opening 1153 where payout of the game ball T or lottery of the special lottery result is performed is arranged in a region (second region) where the game ball T is difficult to circulate when the starting opening door member 1214 is in a normal state. Therefore, even if the game ball T is hit for aiming at the second start opening 1153, the game ball T will not be accepted. Then, when the game ball T can be distributed to a region (second region) in which the game ball T is difficult to circulate, the start opening door member 1214 advances according to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134, the second start hole It becomes possible to cause the game ball T to be accepted by 1153. Therefore, even if the second start opening 1153 is opened in the game area 1100, the game ball T can not be received in the normal state, and is accepted if the start opening door member 1214 does not appear (advance) Since it is impossible, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by advancing the start opening door member 1214, and it is thought that there may be something better for the player by advancing the start opening door member 1214. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is necessary to cause the game ball T to pass through the gate member 1134 in order to advance (appear) the starting opening door member 1214 to form a region (second region) in which the game ball T is easy to circulate. The player can perform a hitting operation (right hitting) of the gaming ball T aiming at the gate member 1134, and the player enjoys the hitting operation of the playing ball T and the interest is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 is moved into and out of the game area 1100 by moving in the longitudinal direction, there is no need to secure a space for inserting the starting opening door member 1214 in the gaming area 1100. The game ball T can be made as wide as possible in the game area 1100, and the movement of the game ball T becomes large by circulating the game ball T in a wide range, and the player can play the game ball T You can enjoy the movement of the to prevent the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the flat start-up opening door member 1214 (the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the longitudinal direction, when viewed from the player side, It can be made difficult to know whether the starting opening door member 1214 is advancing and appearing or is retreating and being immersed. Therefore, the appearance state of the starting opening door member 1214 can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T inserted into the game area 1100 circulates the position of the starting opening door member 1214 and abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance state, and the player enjoys the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming ball T flows down the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 is advanced and appeared, the first guide portion 1214 a of the flat starting opening door member 1214 Of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, so that the game ball T is difficult to flow in the normal state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is inserted. The gaming ball T can be distributed to the lower side of the portion 1161j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction and made to appear in the game area 1100, and the gaming ball T is in circulation (rolling) on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214. When 1214 is retracted, or the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, the second starting opening is changed from contacting the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m while changing the second starting opening When the game ball T has flowed down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start hole 1153, since the start opening door member 1214 is elongated to the left and right. Since the retraction of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed in a very short time by the driving of the starting opening solenoid 1215, the gaming ball T reaches the right end (third guide portion 1214c) of the starting opening door member 1214 To, game ball T is that would fall from the upper starting opening the door member 1214. Therefore, since the game ball T can be prevented from being sufficiently induced when the start-up opening door member 1214 starts to retract, it is possible that the game ball T is additionally received into the second start-up hole 1153. It can control, it can control that load of the game hall which installs pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, the game ball T can be made to feel disappointing by dropping the game ball T from the middle of the start-up opening door member 1214, so that the expectation for the next opportunity can be heightened and the player's interest is reduced can do.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

Reference Signs List 1 pachinko machine 4 game board 1100 game area 1112 game panel 1120 table unit 1134 gate member 1150 winning opening unit 1151 general winning opening 1152 first starting opening 1153 second starting opening 1154 large winning opening 1155 prize winning opening (variable receiving opening)
1156 V winning opening (special entrance)
1220 character and character unit 1220A character and character winning opening unit 1220B V winning hole unit 1221 character and character winning opening opening and closing member 1230 unit front base 1230c missing hole (discharge port)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a plunger 1233 drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a shaft portion 1233b extension piece 1233c drive gear 1233d engagement portion 1234 driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a driven gear 1236 rotating body 1236a receiving portion 1238 ball guiding member 1238a peripheral wall portion 1238b upper opening (housing port)
1238c Right mouth (outlet)
1238d ball entrance 1238e upper guiding part 1238f right guiding part T gaming ball

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine in which transition control from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state can be performed,
A specific starting opening which has a movable piece and can receive game media when the movable piece is operated;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the fact that game media are accepted to the particular starting opening,
Lottery means for performing a specific lottery based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Game holding means capable of executing control to make the specific lottery according to the obtained random number be held on hold until the specific holding upper limit number when the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
Special game progress control means capable of executing control to advance a game such that a bonus game state in which a bonus is given to the player occurs when a hit is obtained in a specific lottery by the lottery means;
Advantageous game control means for performing control of the operation of the movable piece with a control mode that facilitates the reception of game media to the specific start port in the advantageous game state than in the normal game state;
The transition control to the advantageous gaming state is performed while the specific lottery for the specific holding upper limit number is put on hold, and a hit is obtained in all of the specific draws that are put on hold. If not, the time reduction invalidation control means performs control such that the expected value of the number of times the movable piece is operated within the time required to complete the specific lottery for the specific upper limit hold number is less than "1". And a game machine characterized by comprising.